IC-7600 manual

INSTRUCTION MANUAL

HF/50 MHz TRANSCEIVER

i7600

FOREWORD

Thank you for makng the IC-7600 your rado of choce. We hope you agree wth Icom’s phlosophy of “technology frst.” Many hours of research and devel-opment went nto the desgn of your IC-7600.

FEATURES Ultimate receiver performance: third-order inter-

cept (IP3) of +30 dBm (HF bands only) Built-in Baudot RTTY and PSK modulator/demodu-

lator and direct PC keyboard connection capability for RTTY and PSK operations without a PC

High resolution spectrum scope— center frequency and fixed frequency modes, plus mini-scope dis-plays

USB connectors on front and rear panels Large LCD with LED backlight

IMPORTANT

READ THIS INSTRUCTION MANUAL CAREFULLY before attemptng to operate the transcever.

SAVE THIS INSTRUCTION MANUAL. Ths manual contans mportant safety and operatng nstructons for the IC-7600.

EXPLICIT DEFINITIONS

WORD DEFINITION

RDANGERPersonal death, serous njury or an exploson may occur.

RWARNINGPersonal njury, fre hazard or electrc shock may occur.

CAUTION Equpment damage may occur.

NOTEIf dsregarded, nconvenence only. No rsk of personal njury, fire or electrc shock.

Spurous sgnals may be receved near the followng frequences. These are made n the nternal crcut and does not ndcate a transcever malfuncton.10.4923MHz, 24.576MHz

SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES

The transcever comes wth the followng accessores.Qty.

qHand mcrophone ............................................ 1wDC power cable ............................................... 1eSpare fuse (ATC 5 A) ...................................... 1rSpare fuse (ATC 30 A) .................................... 2t 6.35 (d) mm plug ............................................... 1

q

e

t

w

r

FCC INFORMATION• FOR CLASS B UNINTENTIONAL RADIATORS:Ths equpment has been tested and found to comply wth the lmts for a Class B dgtal devce, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These lmts are desgned to provde reasonable protecton aganst harmful nterference n a resdental nstallaton. Ths equp-ment generates, uses and can radate rado frequency energy and, f not nstalled and used n accordance wth the nstructons, may cause harmful nterference to rado communcatons. However, there s no guar-antee that nterference wll not occur n a partcular nstallaton. If ths equpment does cause harmful nterference to rado or televson recepton, whch can be determned by turnng the equpment off and on, the user s encouraged to try to correct the nterfer-ence by one or more of the followng measures:

• Reorent or relocate the recevng antenna. • Increase the separaton between the equpment

and recever. • Connect the equpment nto an outlet on a

crcut dfferent from that to whch the recever s connected.

• Consult the dealer or an experenced rado/TV techncan for help.

Icom, Icom Inc. and the Icom logo are regstered trademarks of Icom Incorporated (Japan) n the Unted States, the Unted Kng-dom, Germany, France, Span, Russa and/or other countres.Mcrosoft, Wndows and Wndows Vsta are ether regstered trade-marks or trademarks of Mcrosoft Corporaton n the Unted States and/or other countres.All other products or brands are regstered trademarks or trade-marks of ther respectve holders.

PRECAUTIONS

R WARNING HIGH RF VOLTAGE! NEVER attach an antenna or nternal antenna connector durng transmsson. Ths may result n an electrcal shock or burn.

R WARNING! NEVER operate the transcever wth a headset or other audo accessores at hgh volume levels. Hearng experts advse aganst contnu-ous hgh volume operaton. If you experence a rngng n your ears, reduce the volume or dscontnue use.

R WARNING! Immedately turn the transcever power OFF and remove the power cable f t emts an abnormal odor, sound or smoke. Contact your Icom dealer or dstrbutor for advce.

CAUTION! NEVER put the transcever n any unstable place (such as on a slanted surface or vbrated place). Ths may cause njury and/or damage to the transcever.

CAUTION! NEVER change the nternal settngs of the transcever. Ths may reduce transcever perfor-mance and/or damage to the transcever.

In partcular, ncorrect settngs for transmtter crcuts, such as output power, dlng current, etc., mght damage the expensve fnal devces.

The transcever warranty does not cover any prob-lems caused by unauthorzed nternal adjustment.

CAUTION! NEVER apply AC power to the [DC13.8V] socket on the transcever rear panel. Ths could cause a fre or damage the transcever.

CAUTION! NEVER apply more than 16 V DC, such as a 24 V battery, to the [DC13.8V] socket on the transcever rear panel. Ths could cause a fre or damage the transcever.

CAUTION! NEVER let metal, wre or other objects protrude nto the transcever or nto connectors on the rear panel. Ths may result n an electrc shock.

CAUTION! NEVER block any coolng vents on the top, rear or bottom of the transcever.

CAUTION! NEVER expose the transcever to ran, snow or any lquds.

CAUTION! NEVER nstall the transcever n a place wthout adequate ventlaton. Heat dsspaton may be reduced, and the transcever may be damaged.

CAUTION! NEVER operate or touch the trans-cever wth wet hands. Ths may result n an electrc shock or damage to the transcever.

DO NOT use chemcal agents such as benzne or alcohol when cleanng the IC-7600, as they can damage the transcever’s surfaces.

DO NOT push the PTT swtch when you don’t actu-ally desre to transmt.

DO NOT use or place the transcever n areas wth temperatures below ±0°C (+32°F) or above +50°C (+122°F).

DO NOT place the transcever n excessvely dusty envronments or n drect sunlght.

DO NOT place the transcever aganst walls or puttng anythng on top of the transcever. Ths may overheat the transcever.

Always place unt n a secure place to avod nadver-tent use by chldren.

BE CAREFUL! If you use a lnear amplfer, set the transcever’s RF output power to less than the lnear amplfer’s maxmum nput level, otherwse, the lnear amplfer wll be damaged.

BE CAREFUL! The rear panel wll become hot when operatng the transcever contnuously for long per-ods of tme.

Use Icom mcrophones only (suppled or optonal). Other manufacturers’ mcrophones have dfferent pn assgnments, and connecton to the IC-7600 may damage the transcever or mcrophone.

The LCD dsplay may have cosmetc mperfectons that appear as small dark or lght spots. Ths s not a malfuncton or defect, but a normal characterstc of LCD dsplays.

Durng martme moble operaton, keep the trans-cever and mcrophone as far away as possble from the magnetc navgaton compass to prevent errone-ous ndcatons.

Turn the transcever power OFF and/or dsconnect the DC power cable when you wll not use the trans-cever for long perod of tme.

For U.S.A. onlyCAUTION: Changes or modfcatons to ths devce, not expressly approved by Icom Inc., could vod your authorty to operate ths devce under FCC regula-tons.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

TABLE OF CONTENTSFOREWORD .............................................................. iIMPORTANT ............................................................... iEXPLICIT DEFINITIONS ............................................ iSUPPLIED ACCESSORIES....................................... iFCC INFORMATION .................................................. iPRECAUTIONS ......................................................... iiTABLE OF CONTENTS ........................................... iii

1 PANEL DESCRIPTION................................... 1−15 Front panel ........................................................ 1 Rear panel ....................................................... 11 LCD dsplay ..................................................... 13 Screen menu arrangement ............................. 15

2 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS ........ 16−24 Unpackng ....................................................... 16 Selectng a locaton ......................................... 16 Groundng ....................................................... 16 Antenna connecton ........................................ 16 Requred connectons ..................................... 17 D Front panel .................................................. 17 D Rear panel .................................................. 17 Advanced connectons .................................... 18 D Front panel .................................................. 18 D Rear panel— 1 ............................................ 18 D Rear panel— 2 ............................................ 19 USB connecton .............................................. 19 Power supply connectons ............................... 20 External antenna tuner connecton ................. 20 Lnear amplfier connectons ........................... 21 D Connectng the IC-PW1/EURO ................... 21 D Connectng a non-Icom lnear amplfier ...... 21 Transverter jack nformaton ............................ 22 FSK and AFSK (SSTV) connectons ............... 22 D FSK operaton—

when connectng to [ACC 1] ....................... 22 D AFSK operaton .......................................... 22 D When connectng to the [USB] connector ... 22 Mcrophone connector nformaton .................. 23 Mcrophones .................................................... 23 D HM-36 ......................................................... 23 D SM-50 (Opton) ........................................... 23 Accessory connector nformaton .................... 24

3 BASIC OPERATION ..................................... 25−37 Before first applyng power .............................. 25 Applyng power (CPU resettng) ...................... 25 Selectng VFO/memory mode ......................... 26 Man/Sub band selecton ................................. 26 D Man/Sub band swtchng ............................ 26 D Man/Sub band equalzaton ....................... 26 Selectng an operatng band ........................... 27 D Usng the band stackng regsters ............... 27 Frequency settng ............................................ 28 D Tunng wth the man dal ............................. 28 D Drect frequency entry wth the keypad ....... 28 D About 5 MHz band operaton

(USA verson only) ...................................... 29 D Quck tunng step ........................................ 29 D Selectng “kHz” step .................................... 29 D Selectng 1 Hz step ..................................... 30 D Auto tunng step functon ............................ 30 D 1⁄4 tunng step functon ............................... 30 D Band edge warnng beep ............................ 31 Operatng mode selecton ............................... 32 Squelch and receve (RF) senstvty ............... 33 Volume settng ................................................. 34 Meter ndcaton selecton ................................ 34 D Mult-functon dgtal meter .......................... 34 D Meter type selecton .................................... 35 Voce syntheszer operaton ............................. 35 Basc transmt operaton .................................. 36 D Transmttng ................................................. 36 D Mcrophone gan adjustment ....................... 36 D Drve gan adjustment ................................. 37

4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT .......................... 38−89 Functons for CW operaton ............................. 38 D About CW reverse mode ............................. 38 D About CW ptch control ............................... 38 D CW sdetone functon .................................. 38 D APF (Audo Peak Flter) operaton .............. 39 Electronc keyer functons ............................... 40 D Memory keyer screen ................................. 41 D Edtng a memory keyer .............................. 42 D Contest number set mode .......................... 43 D Keyer set mode ........................................... 44

TABLE OF CONTENTS RTTY (FSK) operaton ..................................... 46 D About RTTY reverse mode ......................... 47 D Twn peak filter ............................................ 47 D Functons for the RTTY decoder ndcaton .. 48 D Settng the decoder threshold level ............. 48 D RTTY memory transmsson ....................... 49 D Automatc transmsson/recepton settng ... 49 D Edtng RTTY memory ................................ 50 D RTTY decode set mode .............................. 51 D Data savng ................................................. 53 PSK operaton ................................................. 54 D About BPSK and QPSK modes .................. 55 D Functons for the PSK decoder ndcaton ... 56 D Settng the decoder threshold level ............. 56 D PSK memory transmsson ......................... 57 D Automatc transmsson/recepton settng ... 57 D Edtng PSK memory .................................. 58 D PSK decode set mode ................................ 59 D Data savng ................................................. 61 Repeater operaton ......................................... 62 D Repeater access tone frequency settng .... 62 Tone squelch operaton ................................... 63 Data mode (AFSK) operaton .......................... 64 Spectrum scope screen .................................. 65 D Center mode ............................................... 65 D Fxed mode ................................................. 66 D Mn scope screen ndcaton ....................... 67 D Scope set mode .......................................... 67 Preamplfier ..................................................... 72 Attenuator ........................................................ 72 RIT functon ..................................................... 73 D RIT montor functon ................................... 73 AGC functon ................................................... 74 D Selectng the preset value .......................... 74 D Settng the AGC tme constant preset value .. 74 Twn PBT operaton ......................................... 75 IF filter selecton .............................................. 76 D IF filter selecton .......................................... 76 D Flter passband wdth settng

(except FM mode) ....................................... 76 D Roofing filter selecton ................................ 77 D DSP filter shape .......................................... 77 D Flter shape set mode ................................. 78

Dualwatch operaton........................................ 79 Nose blanker .................................................. 81 D NB set mode ............................................... 81 Nose reducton ............................................... 82 Dal lock functon ............................................. 82 Notch functon ................................................. 83 Auto tune functon ........................................... 83 VOX functon .................................................... 84 D Usng the VOX functon ............................... 84 D Adjustng the VOX functon ......................... 84 Break-n functon ............................................. 85 D Sem break-n operaton .............................. 85 D Full break-n operaton ................................ 85 Speech compressor ........................................ 86 Transmt filter wdth settng .............................. 86 ∂TX functon ................................................... 87 D ∂TX montor functon .................................. 87 Montor functon ............................................... 87 Splt frequency operaton ................................ 88 Quck splt functon .......................................... 89 D Splt lock functon ........................................ 89

5 VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS ............... 90−98 About dgtal voce recorder ............................. 90 Recordng a receved audo ............................ 91 D Basc recordng ........................................... 91 D One-touch recordng ................................... 91 Playng the recorded audo.............................. 92 D Basc playng ............................................... 92 D One-touch playng ....................................... 92 Protect the recorded contents ......................... 93 Erasng the recorded contents ........................ 93 Recordng a message for transmt .................. 94 D Recordng ................................................... 94 D Confirmng a message for transmt ............. 94 Programmng a memory name ........................ 95 Sendng a recorded message ......................... 96 D Transmt level settng ................................... 96 Voce set mode ................................................ 97 Savng a voce message

nto the USB-Memory ...................................... 98 D Savng the receved audo memory ............ 98 D Savng the TX memory ............................... 98

v

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

v

TABLE OF CONTENTS6 MEMORY OPERATION .............................. 99−104 Memory channels ............................................ 99 Memory channel selecton .............................. 99 D Usng the [∫]/[√] keys ................................ 99 D Usng the keypad ........................................ 99 Memory lst screen ........................................ 100 D Selectng a memory channel

usng the memory lst screen .................... 100 D Confirmng programmed memory channels .. 100 Memory channel programmng ..................... 101 D Programmng n VFO mode ...................... 101 D Programmng n memory mode ................ 101 Frequency transfers ...................................... 102 D Transferrng n VFO mode ........................ 102 D Transferrng n memory mode ................... 102 Memory names ............................................. 103 D Edtng (programmng) memory names .... 103 Memory clearng ............................................ 103 Memo pads ................................................... 104 D Wrtng frequences and operatng modes

nto memo pads ........................................ 104 D Callng up a frequency from a memo pad .. 104

7 SCANS ..................................................... 105−111 Scan types .................................................... 105 Preparaton .................................................... 105 Scan set mode .............................................. 106 Programmed scan operaton ......................... 107 ∂F scan operaton ......................................... 107 Fne programmed scan/Fne ∂F scan ........... 108 Memory scan operaton ................................. 109 Select memory scan operaton ...................... 109 Settng select memory channels ................... 110 D Settng n scan screen .............................. 110 D Settng n memory lst screen ................... 110 D Erasng the select scan settng ................. 110 Tone scan ...................................................... 111

8 ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION ............. 112−114 Automatc antenna selecton ......................... 112 Antenna tuner operaton ................................ 113 D Tuner operaton ......................................... 113 D Manual tunng ........................................... 113 Optonal external tuner operaton .................. 114

9 CLOCK AND TIMERS .............................. 115−117 Clock set mode ............................................. 115 Daly tmer settng .......................................... 116 Settng sleep tmer ........................................ 117 Tmer operaton ............................................. 117

10 SET MODE ............................................... 118−143 Set mode descrpton .................................... 118 D Set mode operaton .................................. 118 D Screen arrangement ................................. 119 Level set mode .............................................. 120 ACC set mode ............................................... 124 Dsplay set mode ........................................... 126 Others set mode ............................................ 128 USB-Memory set menu ................................. 136 D USB-Memory set screen arrangement ..... 136 Fle loadng .................................................... 137 D Load opton set mode ............................... 138 Fle savng ..................................................... 139 D Save opton set mode ............................... 140 Changng a file name .................................... 141 Deletng a file ............................................... 142 Unmountng USB-Memory ............................ 142 Formattng the USB-Memory ........................ 143

11 MAINTENANCE ....................................... 144−150 Troubleshootng ............................................. 144 D Transcever power ..................................... 144 D Transmt and receve ................................. 144 D Scannng ................................................... 145 D Dsplay ...................................................... 145 D Format USB-Memory ................................ 145 Man dal brake adjustment ........................... 145 SWR readng ................................................. 146 Screen type and font selectons .................... 146 Frequency calbraton (approxmate) ............. 147 Openng the transcever’s case ..................... 148 Clock backup battery replacement ................ 148 Fuse replacement ......................................... 149 D DC power cable fuse replacement ............ 149 D Crcutry fuse replacement ........................ 149 Resettng the CPU ........................................ 149 About protecton ndcatons .......................... 150 Screen saver functon .................................... 150

TABLE OF CONTENTS12 CONTROL COMMAND ............................ 151−159 Remote jack (CI-V) nformaton ..................... 151 D CI-V connecton example .......................... 151 D Data format ............................................... 151 D Command table ........................................ 152 D Data content descrpton ........................... 157

13 SPECIFICATIONS AND OPTIONS .......... 160−161 General ......................................................... 160 Transmtter ..................................................... 160 Recever ........................................................ 160 Antenna tuner ................................................ 160 Optons .......................................................... 161

14 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE ................... 162−165 General ......................................................... 162 Cauton .......................................................... 162 Preparaton .................................................... 163 D Frmware and firm utlty ............................ 163 D Fle downloadng ....................................... 163 Frmware update ........................................... 164

15 CE ............................................................. 166−167

v

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

q POWER SWITCH [POWER•TIMER] (p. 30) While transceiver’s power is OFF: Push to turn the transcever power ON. • Turn the optonal DC power supply ON n advance. • The ndcator on ths swtch lghts green when

powered ON. While transceiver’s power is ON: Push momentarly to toggle the tmer functon

ON and OFF. (p. 117) • The tmer ndcator appears when the tmer functon

s ON. (If the transcever’s power s OFF, the ndcator on ths swtch lghts red.)

Push and hold for 1 sec. to turn the transcever power OFF.

w TRANSMIT SWITCH [TRANSMIT] Selects transmt or receve. • The [TX] ndcator lghts red whle transmttng and the

[RX] ndcator lghts green when the squelch s open.

e HEADPHONE JACK [PHONES] Accepts standard stereo headphones (mpedance:

8 to 16 ø). • Output power: 5 mW wth an 8 ø load. • When headphones are connected, the nternal speaker

or connected external speaker does not functon.

r ELECTRONIC KEYER JACK [ELEC-KEY] Accepts a paddle to actvate the nternal electronc

keyer for CW operaton. (p. 17) • You can select nternal electronc keyer, bug-key or

straght key operaton n keyer set mode screen. (p. 44) • A straght key jack s located on the rear panel. See

[KEY] on p. 12. • Keyer polarty (dot and dash) can be reversed n keyer

set mode screen. (p. 45) • A 4-channel memory keyer s avalable for your

convenence. (p. 41)(dot)(com)(dash)

t USB (Universal Serial Bus) CONNECTOR (A type) [USB] (A) (p. 19)

Insert USB-Memory* for both readng/storng a wde varety of the transcever’s nformaton and data.

• The ndcator above the connector lghts or blnks when the transcever reads or wrtes to the memory data.

• Unmount operaton should be performed before removng the USB-Memory* (p.142).

Connects a PC keyboard for RTTY and PSK operatons, etc.

• Only USB keyboards* are supported. *: USB-Memory and USB keyboard are not suppled

by Icom.

Front panel

TWIN-PBT

RIT/ TX

NOTCH CW PITCH

VOICE MEMORY

BAL NR

AF RF/SQL

MIC GAIN RF POWER BK-IN DELAY KEY SPEED

TIMER

PHONES

ELEC-KEY

MIC

AUTOTUNE

GENE F-INP

1.8 3.51 2

14 5 18 6

7 3

24 8 28 9

50 0 ENT

4

7

10

21

CHANGE

TSXFC

SPLIT

DUALWATCH

MAIN/SUB

VFO/MEMO

MP-W

MW

MP-R

F-6F-5F-4F-3F-2F-1

NRNB

PBT-CLR APF/TPFNOTCH

POWER

RIT CLEARTX

SPEECHLOCKFILTER REC PLAYEXIT/SETSSB CW RTTY/PSK AM/FM

MONITORTRANSMIT TUNER

HF/50MHz TRANSCEIVERLOCKTX RX SPLIT

q

w

e

y

t

r

u i o !0

1

1

PANEL DESCRIPTION

y MICROPHONE CONNECTOR [MIC] Accepts the suppled or optonal mcrophone. • See p. 161 for approprate mcrophones. • See p. 23 for mcrophone connector nformaton.

u MIC GAIN CONTROL [MIC GAIN] (p. 36) Adjusts mcrophone nput gan. • The transmt audo tone n SSB, AM and FM modes

can be adjusted ndependently n level set mode. (p. 121)

How to set the microphone gain.Set the [MIC GAIN] control so that the ALC meter occasonally moves up-scale durng normal voce transmsson n SSB, AM or FM mode.

MIC GAIN

Recommended level for an Icom microphone

Increases

DecreasesPush

i AF CONTROL [AF] (nner control; p. 34) Vares the audo output level of the speaker or

headphones.

Increases

Decreases

o RF POWER CONTROL [RF POWER] (p. 36) Contnuously vares the RF output power from

mnmum (2 W*) to maxmum (100 W*). *AM mode: 1 W to 30 W

Increasesmax. 100 W(30 W for AM)

Decreasesmin. 2 W(1 W for AM)

Push

!0 RF GAIN CONTROL/SQUELCH CONTROL [RF/SQL] (outer control; p. 33)

Adjusts the RF gan and squelch threshold level. The squelch removes nose output from the speaker

(closed condton) when no sgnal s receved.

• The squelch s partcularly effectve for FM. It s also avalable for other modes.

• 12 to 1 o’clock poston s recommended for any settng of the [RF/SQL] control.

• The control can be set as ‘Auto’ (RF gan control n SSB, CW, RTTY and PSK; squelch control n AM and FM) or squelch control (RF gan s fxed at maxmum) n set mode as follows. (p. 128)

MODESET MODE SETTING

AUTO SQL RF GAIN + SQLSSB, CW

RTTY/PSKRF GAIN SQL RF GAIN + SQL

AM, FM SQL SQL RF GAIN + SQL

• When setting as RF gain/squelch control

Maximum RF gain

S-meter squelch

Noise squelch (FM mode)

Squelch is open.

RF gain adjustablerange

Recommended level

• When functioning as RF gain control (Squelch s fixed open; SSB, CW, RTTY and PSK only)

Minimum RF gain

Adjustablerange

Maximum RF gain

• When functioning as squelch control (RF gan s fixed at maxmum.)

Squelch is open.

S-meter squelch

S-meter squelchthreshold

Noise squelch threshold (FM mode)

Shallow Deep


Whle rotatng the RF gan control, nose may be heard. Ths comes from the DSP unt and does not ndcate an equpment malfuncton.

2

1PANEL DESCRIPTION

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

!1 BREAK-IN DELAY CONTROL [BK-IN DELAY] (p. 85)

Adjusts the transmt-to-receve swtchng delay tme for CW sem-break-n operatons.

PushShort delay for high speed keying (2 dots)

Long delay for slow speed keying (13 dots)

!2 ELECTRONIC CW KEYER SPEED CONTROL [KEY SPEED] (p. 85)

Adjusts keyng speed for the nternal electronc CW keyer from 6 wpm (mn.) to 48 wpm (max.).

Push Slow(6 wpm)

Fast(48 wpm)

!3 MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCHES Push to select the functons ndcated n the LCD

dsplay to the rght of these swtches. • Functons vary dependng on the operatng condton.

MF1 (MULTI-FUNCTION 1 SWITCH)ANT SWITCH (ANT)

Selects the antenna connector be-tween ANT1 and ANT2 when pushed. (p. 112)

Turns the [RX ANT] (receve antenna) ON and OFF when pushed and held for 1 sec.

• When the receve antenna s actvated, the antenna connected to the [ANT1] or [ANT2] s used for transmttng only.

When a transverter s n use, ths [ANT] does not functon and ‘TRV’ appears.

MF2 (MULTI-FUNCTION 2 SWITCH)METER SWITCH (METER) (p. 34)

Selects RF power (Po), SWR, ALC, COMP, Vd or Id meterng durng trans-mt.

Swtches the mult-functon dgtal meter ON and OFF when pushed and held for 1 sec.

Front panel (contnued)

TWIN-PBT

RIT/ TX

NOTCH CW PITCH

VOICE MEMORY

BAL NR

AF RF/SQL


TIMER

PHONES

ELEC-KEY

MIC

AUTOTUNE

M.SCOPE

GENE F-INP

1.8 3.51 2

14 5 18 6

7 3

24 8 28 9

50 0 ENT

4

7

10

21

CHANGE

TSXFC

SPLIT

DUALWATCH

MAIN/SUB

VFO/MEMO

MP-W

MW

MP-R

F-6F-5F-4F-3F-2F-1

NRNB


POWER

RIT CLEARTX




!1 !2

!3

3

1 PANEL DESCRIPTION

MF3 (MULTI-FUNCTION 3 SWITCH)P.AMP SWITCH (P.AMP) (p. 72)

Selects one of 2 receve RF preamps or bypasses them.

• “P. AMP1” actvates 10 dB preamp. • “ P. AMP2” actvates 16 dB hgh-gan pre-

amp. • “P. AMP OFF” can also be selected. Turns the preamp functon OFF when

pushed and held for 1 sec.

What is the preamp?The preamp amplfes sgnals n the front end to mprove S/N rato and senstvty. Select “P. AMP1” or “P. AMP2” when recevng weak sgnals.

MF4 (MULTI-FUNCTION 4 SWITCH)ATT SWITCH (ATT) (p. 72)

Selects 6 dB, 12 dB or 18 dB attenua-tor when pushed.

• “ATT OFF” can also be selected. Turns the attenuator functon OFF

when pushed and held for 1 sec.

What is the attenuator?The attenuator prevents a desred sgnal from beng dstorted when very strong sgnals are near the desred frequency, or when very strong electro-magnetc felds, such as from a broadcastng sta-ton, are near your locaton.

MF5 (MULTI-FUNCTION 5 SWITCH)AGC SWITCH (AGC) (p. 74)

Actvates and selects fast, mddle or slow AGC tme constant when pushed.

• In FM mode, only “FAST” s avalable. Enters the AGC set mode when

pushed and held for 1 sec.

AGC tme constant can be set be-tween 0.1 to 8.0 sec. (depends on mode), or turned OFF. When AGC s “OFF,” the S-meter does not functon.

What is the AGC?The AGC controls recever gan to produce a con-stant audo output level, even when the receved sgnal strength vares dramatcally. Select “FAST” for tunng and then select “MID” or “SLOW” de-pendng on the recevng condton.

MF6 (MULTI-FUNCTION 6 SWITCH)VOX SWITCH (VOX) (p. 84)

Push to turn the VOX functon ON and OFF durng SSB, AM and FM mode operaton.

Push and hold for 1 sec. to enter VOX set mode.

What is the VOX function?The VOX functon (voce operated transmsson) actvates transmsson wthout pushng the trans-mt swtch or PTT swtch when you speak nto the mcrophone; then automatcally returns to receve when you stop speakng.

BK-IN SWITCH (BK-IN) (p. 85) Selects sem break-n, full break-n

operaton, or turns the break-n opera-ton OFF when pushed n CW mode.

What is the break-in function?The break-n functon swtches transmt and re-ceve wth CW keyng. Full break-n functon (QSK) can montor the receve sgnal durng keyng.

MF7 (MULTI-FUNCTION 7 SWITCH)COMP SWITCH (COMP) (p. 86)

Turns the speech compressor ON and OFF n SSB mode.

Swtches the narrow, mddle or wde compresson when pushed and held for 1 sec.

What is the speech compressor?The speech compressor compresses the trans-mtter audo nput to ncrease the average audo output level, to ncrease talk power. Ths functon s effectve for long-dstance communcaton or when propagaton condtons are poor.

1⁄4 SWITCH (1⁄4) (p. 30) Turns the 1⁄4 speed tunng functon

ON and OFF n SSB data, CW, RTTY and PSK modes.

• 1⁄4 functon sets dal rotaton to 1⁄4 of normal speed for fine tunng.

TONE SWITCH (TONE) (pgs. 62, 63) Swtches between the tone encoder,

tone squelch functon and no-tone op-eraton when pushed n FM mode.

Enters the tone set mode when pushed and held for 1 sec. n FM mode.

4

1PANEL DESCRIPTION

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

!4 NOISE REDUCTION SWITCH [NR] (p. 82) Push to swtch DSP nose reducton ON and OFF. • The ndcator on ths swtch lghts green when the func-

ton s actvated.

!5 NOISE REDUCTION LEVEL CONTROL [NR] (outer control; p. 82)

Adjusts the DSP nose reducton level when the nose reducton functon s n use. Set for maxmum readablty.

• To use ths control, push [NR] (!4) n advance.

Decreases

Increases

!6 MONITOR SWITCH [MONITOR] (p. 87) Montors your transmtted IF sgnal. • The CW sdetone functons regardless of the [MONI-

TOR] swtch settng n CW mode. • The ndcator on ths swtch lghts green whle the func-

ton s actvated.

!7 ANTENNA TUNER SWITCH [TUNER] (p. 113) Turns the nternal antenna tuner ON and OFF

(bypass) when pushed momentarly. • The ndcator on ths swtch lghts green when the

tuner s turned ON, goes off when tuner s turned OFF (bypassed).

Tunes the antenna tuner manually when pushed and held for 1 sec.

• The ndcator on ths swtch blnks red durng manual tunng.

• When the tuner cannot tune the antenna, the tunng crcut s bypassed automatcally after 20 sec.

!8 BALANCE CONTROL [BAL] (nner control; p. 79) Adjusts the audo output balance between man

and sub readout frequences whle n dualwatch.

Increases mainreadout gain

Increases subreadout gain

!9 NOISE BLANKER SWITCH [NB] (p. 81) Swtches the nose blanker ON and OFF when

pushed. The nose blanker reduces pulse-type nose such as that generated by automoble gnton systems. Ths functon cannot be used n FM mode, and s not effectve for non-pulse-type nose.

• The ndcator on ths swtch lghts green whle the functon s actvated.

Enters the nose blanker level set mode when pushed and held for 1 sec.

@0 LCD FUNCTION SWITCHES [F-1] to [F-6] Push to select the functon ndcated n the LCD

dsplay above these swtches. • Functons vary dependng on the operatng condton.


TWIN-PBT

RIT/ TX

NOTCH CW PITCH

VOICE MEMORY

BAL NR

AF RF/SQL


TIMER

PHONES

ELEC-KEY

MIC

AUTOTUNE

GENE F-INP

1.8 3.51 2

14 5 18 6

7 3

24 8 28 9

50 0 ENT

4

7

10

21

CHANGE

TSXFC

SPLIT

DUALWATCH

MAIN/SUB

M.SCOPE VFO/MEMO

MP-W

MW

MP-R

F-6F-5F-4F-3F-2F-1

NRNB


POWER

RIT CLEARTX




!4!5!6!7

!9

!8

@0 @1 @2 @3 @7 @8 @9@6@5@4

5

1 PANEL DESCRIPTION

@1 MODE SWITCHES Selects the desred mode. (p. 32) • Announces the selected mode va the speech synthe-

szer. (p. 35)

[SSB] Selects USB and LSB modes alternately when

pushed. Selects SSB data mode (USB-D, LSB-D) when

pushed and held for 1 sec. n SSB mode. • In SSB data mode, push to return to SSB mode. Swtches D1, D2 and D3 when pushed and held

for 1 sec. n SSB data mode.

[CW] Selects CW and CW-R (CW reverse) modes alter-

nately when pushed.

[RTTY/PSK] Selects RTTY and PSK modes alternately when

pushed. Swtches RTTY and RTTY-R (RTTY reverse)

mode when pushed and held for 1 sec. n RTTY mode.

Swtches PSK and PSK-R (PSK reverse) mode when pushed and held for 1 sec. n PSK mode.

[AM/FM] Selects AM and FM modes alternately. Selects AM or FM data mode (AM-D/FM-D)

when pushed and held for 1 sec. n AM or FM mode, respectvely.

• In AM or FM data mode, push to return to AM or FM mode, respectvely.

Swtches D1, D2 and D3 when pushed and held for 1 sec. n AM or FM data mode.

@2 FILTER SWITCH [FILTER] (p. 76) Push to select one of 3 IF filter settngs. Push and hold for 1 sec. to dsplay the filter set

screen.

@3 EXIT/SET SWITCH [EXIT/SET] Push to ext, or return to the prevous screen n-

dcaton durng spectrum scope, memory, scan or set mode screen dsplay.

Push and hold for 1 sec. to dsplay the set mode menu screen.

@4 VOICE MEMORY RECORD SWITCH [REC] (p. 91)

Push to record the prevous receved sgnal for the preset tme perod.

• The preset tme perod can be set n voce set mode. (p. 97)

Push and hold for 1 sec. to record the receved sgnal untl the recordng s cancelled.

• Push ths swtch momentarly to stop recordng. • The memory records the latest 30 sec. of audo.

@5 VOICE MEMORY PLAYBACK SWITCH [PLAY] (p. 92)

Push to playback the prevously recorded audo for the preset tme perod.

Push and hold for 1 sec. to playback all of the prevously recorded audo.

@6 AUTOMATIC TUNING SWITCH [AUTO TUNE] (p. 83)

Turns the automatc tunng functon ON and OFF n CW and AM modes.

IMPORTANT!When recevng a weak sgnal, or recevng a sg-nal wth nterference, the automatc tunng func-ton may tune the recever to an undesred sgnal.

@7 MAIN DIAL Changes the dsplayed frequency, selects set

mode settng, etc.

@8 SPEECH/LOCK SWITCH [SPEECH/LOCK] Push to announce the S-meter ndcaton, the

dsplayed frequency and the operatng mode. (p. 35)

• The parameters to be announced can be selected n the others set mode. (p. 131)

Push and hold for 1 sec. to turn the dal lock functon ON and OFF. (p. 82)

• The dal lock functon electroncally locks the man dal.

• The lock ndcator lghts whle the dal lock functon s actvated.

NOTE: The [SPEECH/LOCK] swtch operaton to actvate the voce syntheszer or the dal lock functons can be replaced n others set mode. (p. 131)

@9 RIT/∂TX CONTROL [RIT/∂TX] (pgs. 73, 87) Shfts the receve and/or transmt frequency wth-

out changng the transmt and/or receve frequency shown on the man VFO whle the RIT and/or ∂TX functons are/s ON.

• Rotate the control clockwse to ncrease the frequency, or rotate the control counterclockwse to decrease the frequency. The RIT or ∂TX functons must be ON.

• The shft frequency range s ±9.999 kHz n 1 Hz steps (or ±9.99 kHz n 10 Hz steps).

Low shift

High shift

6

1PANEL DESCRIPTION

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

#0 TRANSMIT INDICATOR [TX] Lghts red whle transmttng.

#1 RECEIVE INDICATOR [RX] Lghts green whle recevng a sgnal and when the

squelch s open.

#2 LCD FUNCTION DISPLAY (p. 13) Shows the operatng frequency, functon swtch

menus, spectrum scope screen, memory lst screen, set mode settngs, etc.

#3 SPLIT OPERATION INDICATOR [SPLIT] (p. 88) Lghts durng splt frequency operaton.

#4 MAIN/SUB CHANGE SWITCH [CHANGE] Swtches the frequency and selected memory

channel between man and sub readouts when pushed.

• Swtches between transmt frequency and receve frequency when the splt frequency functon s ON. (p. 88)

Equalzes the sub readout frequency to the man readout frequency when pushed and held for 1 sec.

#5 LOCK INDICATOR [LOCK] (p. 82) Lghts when the dal lock functon s actvated.

#6 DUALWATCH SWITCH [DUALWATCH] (p. 79) Push to turn the dualwatch functon ON and

OFF. • “ ” appears when the dualwatch functon

s n use. Push and hold for 1 sec. to turn the dualwatch

functon ON and equalzes the sub readout fre-quency to the man readout. (Quck dualwatch functon)

• The quck dualwatch functon can be turned OFF n others set mode. (p. 128)

#7 SPLIT SWITCH [SPLIT] (p. 88) Push to turn the splt functon ON and OFF. • “ ” appears when the splt functon s n

use. Push and hold for 1 sec. to actvate the quck

splt functon. • The splt functon ON and equalze the sub readout

frequency to the man readout and sets the sub readout for frequency nput n non-FM modes. (p. 89)

• The offset frequency s shfted from the selected VFO frequency n FM mode. (p. 129)

• The tone encoder functon s turned ON n FM mode.

• The quck splt functon can be turned OFF n others set mode. (p. 129)

#8 KEYPAD Pushng a key selects the operatng band. (p. 27) • [GEN •] selects the general coverage band. Pushng the same key 2 or 3 tmes calls up

other stacked frequences n the band. (p. 27) • Icom’s trple band stackng regster memorzes 3 fre-

quences n each band. After pushng [F-INP ENT], push a key on the

keypad to enter a numerc frequency. After en-terng, push [F-INP ENT] to select the desred frequency drectly (p. 28)

• e.g. to enter 14.195 MHz; Push [F-INP ENT] [1] [4] [•] [1] [9] [5] [F-INP ENT]. After pushng [F-INP ENT], push a key on the

keypad to enter a memory channel. After enter-ng, push [∫]/[√] to select the desred memory channel drectly. (p. 99)


TWIN-PBT

RIT/ TX

NOTCH CW PITCH

VOICE MEMORY

BAL NR

AF RF/SQL


TIMER

PHONES

ELEC-KEY

MIC

AUTOTUNE

GENE F-INP

1.8 3.51 2

14 5 18 6

7 3

24 8 28 9

50 0 ENT

4

7

10

21

CHANGE

TSXFC

SPLIT

DUALWATCH

MAIN/SUB

M.SCOPE VFO/MEMO

MP-W

MW

MP-R

F-6F-5F-4F-3F-2F-1

NRNB


POWER

RIT CLEARTX




$2

$3

#0 #5#4 #6 #7 #8 #9

$0

#3#2#1

$1

$4$5

7

1 PANEL DESCRIPTION

#9 PASSBAND TUNING CONTROLS [TWIN-PBT] (p. 75)

Adjusts the recever’s IF flter passband wdth va the DSP.

• Passband wdth and shft frequency are dsplayed n the mult-functon dsplay.

• Push and hold [PBT-CLR] for 1 sec. to clear the PBT settngs.

• Adjustment range s set to half of the IF filter passband wdth. 25 Hz steps and 100 Hz steps are avalable.

What is the PBT control?The PBT functon electroncally modfes the IF pass-band wdth to reject nterference. Ths transcever uses the DSP crcut for the PBT functon.

PBT2

PBT1

– +

Low cutHigh cut Center

$0 PBT CLEAR SWITCH [PBT-CLR] (p. 75) Push and hold for 1 sec. to clear the PBT settngs. • The ndcator on ths swtch lghts green when PBT s n

use.

$1 NOTCH SWITCH [NOTCH] (p. 83) Swtches the notch functon between auto, man-

ual and OFF n SSB and AM modes. • Ether auto or manual notch functon can be deact-

vated n others set mode. (p. 132) Turns the manual notch functon ON and OFF

when pushed n CW, RTTY and PSK mode. Turns the auto notch functon ON and OFF

when pushed n FM mode. • “ ” appears when manual notch s n use. • “ ” appears when auto notch s n use. • No ndcator appears when the notch functon s not

n use. Push and hold for 1 sec. to swtch the manual

notch characterstcs from wde, mddle and nar-row when manual notch functon s actvated.

• The ndcator on ths swtch lghts green when the functon s actvated.

What is the notch function?The notch functon s a narrow flter that elmnates un-wanted CW or AM carrer tones whle preservng the de-sred voce sgnal. The DSP crcut automatcally adjusts the notch frequency to effectvely elmnate unwanted tones.

$2 ∂TX SWITCH [∂TX] (p. 87) Push to turn the ∂TX functon ON and OFF. • Use [RIT/∂TX] control to vary the ∂TX frequency. Push and hold for 1 sec. to add the ∂TX shft

frequency to the operatng frequency.

What is the ∂TX function?∂TX shfts the transmt frequency wthout shftng the re-ceve frequency. Ths s useful for smple splt frequency operaton n CW, etc.

$3 CLEAR SWITCH [CLEAR] (pgs. 73, 87) Push or push and hold for 1 sec.* to clear the RIT/

∂TX shft frequency. * Dependng on the quck RIT/∂TX clear functon settng

(p. 132).

$4 TRANSMIT FREQUENCY CHECK SWITCH [XFC]

Montors the transmt frequency (ncludng ∂TX frequency offset) when pushed and held durng splt frequency operaton. (p. 88)

• Whle pushng and holdng ths swtch, the transmt frequency can be changed wth the man dal, key-pad, memo pad or [∫]/[√] swtches.

• When the splt lock functon s turned ON, pushng [XFC] cancels the dal lock functon. (pgs. 88, 129)

Montors the operatng frequency drectly when pushed and held when the RIT functon s turned ON. (RIT s temporarly cancelled.) (p. 73)

$5 MAIN/SUB•M.SCOPE SWITCH [MAIN/SUB M.SCOPE]

Push to select access to the man or sub read-out. (p. 26)

• The selected readout frequency s dsplayed clearly. The sub readout functons only durng splt operaton or dualwatch.

Push and hold for 1 sec. to turn the mn spec-trum scope screen ndcaton ON and OFF. (p. 67)

• The mn spectrum scope screen can be ndcated wth another screen, such as memory, set mode screen, smultaneously.

8

1PANEL DESCRIPTION

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

$6 MEMORY UP/DOWN SWITCHES [∫]/[√] (p. 99) Push to select the desred memory channel. • Memory channels can be selected both n VFO and

memory modes. Push to select the desred memory channel d-

rectly after pushng [F-INP ENT] and a memory channel number.

$7 MEMORY WRITE SWITCH [MW] (p. 101) Stores the selected readout frequency and operat-

ng mode nto the dsplayed memory channel when pushed and held for 1 sec.

• Ths functon s avalable both n VFO and memory modes.

$8 MEMO PAD-WRITE SWITCH [MP-W] (p. 104) Programs the dsplayed readout frequency and op-

eratng mode nto a memo pad. • The 5 most recent entres reman n memo pads. • The memo pad capacty can be expanded from 5 to 10

n others set mode. (p. 132)

$9 MEMO PAD-READ SWITCH [MP-R] (p. 104) Each push calls up a frequency and operatng

mode n a memo pad. The 5 (or 10) most recently programmed frequences and operatng modes can be recalled, startng from the most recent.

• The memo pad capacty can be expanded from 5 to 10 n others set mode. (p. 132)

%0 VFO/MEMORY SWITCH [VFO/MEMO] Swtches the selected readout operatng mode

between the VFO and memory when pushed. (pgs. 26, 99)

Transfers the memory contents to VFO when pushed and held for 1 sec. (p. 102)

%1 QUICK TUNING SWITCH [TS] Turns the quck tunng step ON and OFF. (p. 29) • Whle the quck tunng ndcator, “Z,” s dsplayed

above the frequency ndcaton, the frequency can be changed n programmed kHz steps.

• 0.1, 1, 5, 9, 10, 12.5, 20 and 25 kHz steps are aval-able for each operatng mode ndependently.

When the quck tunng step s ON, push and hold for 1 sec. to enter quck tunng step set mode. (p. 29)

When the quck tunng step s OFF, push and hold for 1 sec. to turn the 1 Hz tunng step ON and OFF. (p. 30)

%2 AUDIO PEAK FILTER/TWIN PEAK FILTER SWITCH [APF/TPF]

During CW mode operation (p. 39) Push to turn the audo peak filter ON and OFF. • “ ” appears when audo peak filter s n use. When the audo peak filter s ON, push and hold

for 1 sec. to select the APF passband wdth from WIDE, MID and NAR or from 320, 160 and 80 Hz dependng on APF type settng (SOFT or SHARP).

During RTTY mode operation (p. 47) Push to turn the twn peak filter ON and OFF. • “ ” appears when twn peak filter s n use. • The ndcator on ths swtch lghts green when the

functon s actvated.


TWIN-PBT

RIT/ TX

NOTCH CW PITCH

VOICE MEMORY

BAL NR

AF RF/SQL


TIMER

PHONES

ELEC-KEY

MIC

AUTOTUNE

GENE F-INP

1.8 3.51 2

14 5 18 6

7 3

24 8 28 9

50 0 ENT

4

7

10

21

CHANGE

TSXFC

SPLIT

DUALWATCH

MAIN/SUB

M.SCOPE VFO/MEMO

MP-W

MW

MP-R

F-6F-5F-4F-3F-2F-1

NRNB


POWER

RIT CLEARTX




$6

%2

$7 $8 $9%0%1

%3

%4

%5

9

1 PANEL DESCRIPTION

%3 CW PITCH CONTROL [CW PITCH] (outer control; p. 38) Shfts the receved CW audo ptch and the CW

sdetone ptch wthout changng the operatng fre-quency.

Lower frequency

Higher frequency

%4 MANUAL NOTCH FILTER CONTROL [NOTCH] (nner control; p. 83)

Vares the notch frequency of the manual notch filter to reject an nterferng sgnal whle the manual notch functon s ON.

• Notch filter center frequency: LSB/RTTY/PSK-R : –1040 Hz to +4060 Hz USB/RTTY-R/PSK : –1060 Hz to +4040 Hz CW : CW ptch freq. –2540 Hz to

CW ptch freq. +2540 Hz AM : –5100 Hz to +5100 Hz

Lower frequency

Higher frequency

%5 RIT SWITCH [RIT] (p. 73) Push to turn the RIT functon ON and OFF. • Use [RIT/∂TX] control to vary the RIT frequency. Push and hold for 1 sec. to add the RIT shft fre-

quency to the operatng frequency.

What is the RIT function?The RIT (Recever Incremental Tunng) shfts the receve frequency wthout shftng the transmt frequency.Ths s useful for fine tunng statons callng you off-fre-quency or when you prefer to lsten to slghtly dfferent-soundng voce characterstcs, etc.

10

1PANEL DESCRIPTION

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

Rear panel

1 2ANT DC 13.8V

X-VERTERRX-ANT ACC

TUNER

IN OUT ALC SEND KEY1 2 METER REMOTE EXT-SP

q w re

tyo!0!1!2!7 !6 !5 !4 !3 i u

q GROUND TERMINAL [GND] (p. 16) Connect ths termnal to a ground to prevent elec-

trcal shocks, TVI, BCI and other problems.

w ANTENNA CONNECTOR 1 [ANT1]e ANTENNA CONNECTOR 2 [ANT2] (pgs. 17, 112) Accept a 50 ø antenna wth a PL-259 plug connec-

tor.

When usng an optonal AH-4 HF/50 MHz AUTO-MATIC ANTENNA TUNER, connect t to the [ANT1] connector. The nternal antenna tuner actvates for [ANT2] and deactvates for [ANT1] when connectng the AH-4.

r DC POWER SOCKET [DC 13.8V] (p. 20) Accepts 13.8 V DC through the suppled DC power

cable.Rear panel view

t EXTERNAL SPEAKER JACK [EXT-SP] (p. 18) Connects an external speaker (4–8 ø), f desred.

y CI-V REMOTE CONTROL JACK [REMOTE] (pgs. 151, 18)

Connects a PC va the optonal CT-17 ci-v level converter for external control of the trans-cever.

Used for transceve operaton wth another Icom CI-V transcever or recever.

u USB (Universal Serial Bus) CONNECTOR (B type) [USB] (B)

Connect a USB cable to be used for the modula-ton nput (p. 124), the transcever operaton wth PC, the receved audo and the decoded character mport to the PC.

CAUTION: For Windows® XP/2000:NEVER nstall the USB drver nto the PC before connectng the transcever and PC usng a USB cable.For Windows Vista™:NEVER connect a PC usng a USB cable untl the USB drver nstallaton has been completed.

About the USB driver: Icom HP (http://www.com.co.jp/world/support/

ndex.html) gves the USB drver and the nstalla-ton gude download servce.

The followng tems are requred: PC • Mcrosoft® Wndows® XP/2000 or

Mcrosoft® Wndows Vsta™ nstalled • Wth USB port Other items • USB cable (thrd party) • PC software

About the modulation input: Select “USB” n the ACC set mode tem ‘DATA OFF

MOD,’ ‘DATA1 MOD,’ ‘DATA2 MOD’ or ‘DATA3 MOD.’ And the modulaton nput level from USB jack can be set n the ACC set mode tem ‘USB MOD Level.’ (p. 124)

11

1 PANEL DESCRIPTION

i METER JACK [METER] (p. 19) Outputs a sgnal showng receved sgnal strength,

transmt output power, VSWR, ALC, speech com-presson, Vd or Id level for external meter ndca-ton.

o STRAIGHT KEY JACK [KEY] (p. 17) Accepts a straght key or external electronc keyer

output usng a 1⁄4 nch standard plug. • [ELEC-KEY] on the front panel can be used for a

straght key or external electronc keyer. Deactvate the nternal electronc keyer n keyer set mode. (p. 45)

(+)

(_)

!0 ACCESSORY SOCKET 2 [ACC 2] !1 ACCESSORY SOCKET 1 [ACC 1] Enable connecton of external equpment such as

a lnear amplfer, an automatc antenna selector/ tuner, a TNC for data communcatons, etc.

• See p. 24 for socket nformaton.

!2 TUNER CONTROL SOCKET [TUNER] (p. 18) Accepts the control cable from an optonal AH-4

HF/50 MHz AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER.

!3 SEND CONTROL JACK [SEND] (p. 18) Connects to ground when transmttng to control an

external unt, such as a non-Icom lnear amplfier.

NOTE: T/R control voltage and current must be less than 16 V DC/0.5 A (or 250 V AC, 200 mA wth MOSFET swtchng).

!4 ALC INPUT JACK [ALC] (p. 18) Connects to the ALC output jack of a non-Icom ln-

ear amplfier.

!5 RECEIVE ANTENNA OUT [RX ANT– OUT]!6 RECEIVE ANTENNA IN [RX ANT– IN] Located between the transmt/receve swtchng

crcut and recever’s RF stage.

Connects an external unt, such as preamplfier or RF filter, usng RCA connectors, f desred.

In ths case, the antenna connector must be se-lected as “ANT 1/R” or “ANT 2/R.” (p. 112)

• When no external unt s connected, “ANT 1” or “ANT 2” must be selected.

Transmitter

IN

[RX ANT]

OUT

Transmit/Receiveswitching circuit

ANT

Receiver

!7 TRANSVERTER CONNECTOR [X-VERTER] (p. 18)

External transverter nput/output connector. Actvated by voltage appled to [ACC 2] pn 6, or

when the transverter functon s n use. (p. 24)

12

1PANEL DESCRIPTION

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

LCD display

q t y u irew

o

!4

!3

!2

!1

e

w!0

!6 !5!2!3

!7

!5!8

!0

!1

!9

@0 @2 @3@1

@4

q S/RF METER (pgs. 35, 126) Shows the sgnal strength whle recevng. Shows

the relatve output power, SWR, ALC, VD, ID or compresson levels whle transmttng.

• A total of 3 meter types are avalable.• Standard meter

• Edgewise meter

• Bar meter

w IF FILTER INDICATOR (p. 76) Shows the selected IF filter number.

e QUICK TUNING INDICATOR (p. 29) Appears when the quck tunng step functon s n

use.

r BANDWIDTH INDICATOR (p. 75) Shows the passband wdth of the IF filter.

t SHIFT FREQUENCY INDICATOR (p. 75) Shows the shft frequency of the IF filter.

y PASSBAND WIDTH INDICATOR (p. 75) Graphcally dsplays the passband wdth for twn

PBT operaton and center frequency for IF shft op-eraton.

u BANDPASS FILTER INDICATOR Appears when the narrow filter (500 Hz or less) s

selected durng SSB, CW, RTTY or PSK operaton.

i CLOCK READOUT Shows the current tme. Local and UTC tme can be ndcated at the same

tme. • Offset tme perod for UTC tme can be set n tme set

mode. (p. 115)

13

1 PANEL DESCRIPTION

o RTTY TUNING INDICATOR Shows the tunng condton n RTTY mode.

!0 MODE INDICATOR Shows the selected mode.

!1 FREQUENCY READOUTS Shows the operatng frequency. • Gray characters are used for not-selected readout.

!2 MEMORY CHANNEL READOUTS Shows the selected memory channel contents

n VFO mode. Shows the VFO contents n memory mode.

!3 SELECT MEMORY CHANNEL INDICATOR (p. 109) Indcates the dsplayed memory channel s set as

a select memory channel.

!4 MULTI-FUNCTION SCREEN Shows the screens for the mult-functon dgtal

meter, spectrum scope, voce recorder, memory lst, scan, memory keyer, RTTY decoder, PSK de-coder, IF filter selecton or set modes, etc.

!5 VFO/MEMORY CHANNEL INDICATOR (p. 26) Indcates the VFO mode or selected memory chan-

nel number.

!6 LCD FUNCTION SWITCH GUIDE Indcates the functon of the LCD functon swtches

([F-1] to [F-6]).

!7 MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCH GUIDE Indcates the functon of the mult-functon swtches.

!8 TX INDICATOR “ ” appears whle transmttng. (p. 36) Indcates the frequency readout for transmt. • “ ” appears durng an operatng frequency s

not n an amateur band. When the band edge warn-ng beep s set to “OFF” (p. 31), “ ” does not appear.

• Appears on the sub band readout when the splt functon s turned ON.

!9 RIT INDICATOR “ ” appears when RIT functon s n use.

@0 ∂TX INDICATOR “ ” appears when ∂TX functon s n use.

@1 RIT/∂TX SHIFT FREQUENCY INDICATOR Shows the shft frequency for the RIT or ∂TX func-

ton.

@2 NOTCH INDICATOR (p. 83) “ ” appears when the manual notch functon

s n use. Ths functon s avalable n SSB, CW, RTTY, PSK and AM modes.

“ ” appears when the auto notch functon s n use. Ths functon s avalable n SSB, AM and FM modes.

@3 APF/TPF INDICATOR “ ” appears when the audo peak filter func-

ton s n use. Ths functon s avalable n CW mode. (p. 39)

“ ” appears when the twn peak flter func-ton s n use. Ths functon s avalable n RTTY mode. (p. 47)

@4 DUAL WATCH INDICATOR “ ” appears when the dualwatch functon

s n use.

14

1PANEL DESCRIPTION

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

The followng screens can be selected from the start-up screen. Choose the desred screen usng the followng chart.

Pushng [EXIT/SET] several tmes returns to the start-up screen. See p. 119 for set mode arrangement.

• Spectrum scope screen (p. 65)

• Voice recorder screen* (p. 90)

• RTTY decoder screen (RTTY mode; p. 46)

• Memory keyer screen (CW mode; p. 40)

• Memory list screen (p. 100)

• PSK decoder screen (PSK mode; p. 54)

• Scan screen (VFO mode; p. 107)

• Scan screen (Memory mode; p. 109)

• Set mode menu screen (p. 118)

F-1 F-2 F-3 F-3

F-4

F-5F-2

F-5F-3

F-6F-3

F-4 F-5 F-6

*Previously selected screen, TX or RX memory, is displayed. Push [T/R] (F-6) to switch the screen.

Screen menu arrangement

15

1 PANEL DESCRIPTION

UnpackingAfter unpackng, mmedately report any damage to the delverng carrer or dealer. Keep the shppng cartons.For a descrpton and a dagram of accessory equp-ment ncluded wth the IC-7600, see ‘Suppled acces-sores’ on p. of ths manual.

Selecting a location Select a locaton for the transcever that allows ade-quate ar crculaton, free from extreme heat, cold, or vbratons, and away from TV sets, TV antenna ele-ments, rados and other electromagnetc sources.

The base of the transcever has adjustable feet for desktop use. Set the feet to one of two angles dependng on your operatng preference.

Grounding To prevent electrcal shock, televson nterference (TVI), broadcast nterference (BCI) and other prob-lems, ground the transcever through the GROUND termnal on the rear panel.For best results, connect a heavy gauge wre or strap to a long ground rod. Make the dstance between the [GND] termnal and ground as short as possble.

R WARNING: NEVER connect the [GND] termnal to a gas or electrc ppe, snce the connec-ton could cause an exploson or electrc shock.

[GND]

Antenna connectionFor rado communcatons, the antenna s of crt-cal mportance, along wth output power and recever senstvty. Select antenna(s), such as a well-matched 50 ø antenna, and feedlne. We recommend 1.5:1 or better of Voltage Standng Wave Rato (VSWR) on your operatng bands. The transmsson lne should be a coaxal cable.When usng a sngle antenna, use the [ANT1] con-nector.

CAUTION: Protect your transcever from lght-nng by usng a lghtnng arrestor.

PL-259 CONNECTOR INSTALLATION EXAMPLE

30 mm

10 mm (soft solder)

10 mm

1–2 mm

solder solder

Softsolder

Coupling ring

Slide the coupling ring down. Strip the cable jacket and soft solder.

Slide the connector body on and solder it.

Screw the coupling ring onto the connec-tor body.

Strip the cable as shown at left. Soft sol-der the center con-ductor.

q

w

e

r

30 mm (9⁄8 n)　10 mm (3⁄8 n)　1–2 mm (1⁄16 n)

Antenna SWREach antenna s tuned for a specfed frequency range and SWR may be ncreased out-of-range. When the SWR s hgher than approx. 2.0:1, the transcever’s power drops to protect the fnal tran-sstors. In ths case, an antenna tuner s useful to match the transcever and antenna. Low SWR allows full power for transmttng. The IC-7600 has an SWR meter to montor the antenna SWR contn-uously.

2

16

INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

Required connectionsD Front panel

TWIN-PBT

RIT/ TX

NOTCH CW PITCH

VOICE MEMORY

BAL NR

AF RF/SQL


TIMER

PHONES

ELEC-KEY

MIC

AUTOTUNE

GENE F-INP

1.8 3.51 2

14 5 18 6

7 3

24 8 28 9

50 0 ENT

4

7

10

21

CHANGE

TSXFC

SPLIT

DUALWATCH

MAIN/SUB

M.SCOPE VFO/MEMO

MP-W

MW

MP-R

F-6F-5F-4F-3F-2F-1

NRNB


POWER

RIT CLEARTX



HF/50MHz TRANSCEIVERLOCKTX RX SPLITCW KEY

A straight key can be used when the internal electronic keyer is turned OFF in keyer set mode. (p. 45)

MICROPHONES (p. 23)

SM-50HM-36

D Rear panel

1 2ANT DC 13.8V

X-VERTERRX-ANT ACC

TUNER


ANTENNA 1, 2 (p. 16)

STRAIGHT KEYGROUND (p. 16)

Use the heaviest gauge wire or strap available and make the connection as short as possible.

Grounding prevents electri-cal shocks, TVI and other problems.

DC POWER SUPPLY (p. 20)

PS-126

ANT1 for 1.8–18 MHz bandsANT 2 for 21–28 MHz bands

[Example]:

17

2 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS

Advanced connectionsD Front panel

TWIN-PBT

RIT/ TX

NOTCH CW PITCH

VOICE MEMORY

BAL NR

AF RF/SQL


TIMER

PHONES

ELEC-KEY

MIC

AUTOTUNE

GENE F-INP

1.8 3.51 2

14 5 18 6

7 3

24 8 28 9

50 0 ENT

4

7

10

21

CHANGE

TSXFC

SPLIT

DUALWATCH

MAIN/SUB

M.SCOPE VFO/MEMO

MP-W

MW

MP-R

F-6F-5F-4F-3F-2F-1

NRNB


POWER

RIT CLEARTX




MIC

USB-MEMORY

The AFSK modulation signal can also be input to [MIC].

KEYBOARDConnects a USB type PC keyboard directly for RTTY/PSK operation, as well as other text edit operations. EXTERNAL KEYPAD

Connects an external keypad for direct voice memory, keyer memory, RTTY TX memory and PSK TX memory controls.

HEADPHONES

To [MIC] connector pin e

To [MIC] connector pin u

1.5k˘±5%

1.5k˘±5%

2.2k˘±5%

4.7k˘±5%

S1(T1/M1/ RT1/PT1)

S2(T2/M2/ RT2/PT2)

S3(T3/M3/ RT3/PT3)

S4(T4/M4/ RT4/PT4)

EXTERNAL KEYPAD

D Rear panel— 1

1 2ANT DC 13.8V

X-VERTERRX-ANT ACC

TUNER


RX ANT IN/OUTConnects an external preamp or lowpass filter.

The antenna connector must be selected as “ANT 1/R” or “ANT 2/R.” (p. 3)

ACC SOCKETS 1, 2(pgs. 22, 24)

ANTENNA 1, 2 (p. 112)Connects a linear amplifier, antenna selector, etc.

[X-VERTER]Connects a transverter for V/UHF band use.

[ALC], [SEND] (p. 21)Used for connecting a non-Icom linear amplifier.

EXTERNAL SPEAKER (p. 161)

SP-23(option)

[REMOTE] (p. 151)Used for computer control and transceive operation. The optional CT-17 is required when connect-ing a PC to [REMOTE].AH-4 (p. 20) AH-2b

or long wire

with

18

2INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

D Rear panel— 21 2ANT DC 13.8V

X-VERTERRX-ANT ACC

TUNER


[METER]Connects an external meter, etc.

3.5 (d) mm; 1⁄8" plug

Output impedance : 4.7 køOutput voltage (open circuit) : 2.5 V (default)

Output voltage can be adjusted 0 to 5 V in ACC set mode. (p. 125)

[USB] (B)When the transceiver is connected to a PC, a USB cable (third party) should be connected to the USB connector (B type) on the rear panel. (p. 11)

USB connection Connect the USB-Memory* to the USB connector (A type) on the front panel. • Unmount operaton s recommended before removng the

USB-Memory* (p.142).

Be sure to connect the USB-Memory correctly. NEVER connect or remove the USB-Memory when the read/wrte ndcator lghts or blnks.

A USB keyboard* or a USB hub* can also be connected to the USB connector.

* USB-Memory, USB keyboard and USB hub are not suppled by Icom. or

19


Power supply connectionsUse a DC power supply wth a 23 A capacty when operatng the transcever wth AC power. Refer to the dagrams below.

CAUTION: Before connectng the DC power cable, check the followng mportant tems. Make sure:• The [POWER] swtch s OFF.• Output voltage of the power source s 12–15 V

when you use a non-Icom power supply.• DC power cable polarty s correct. Red : Postve + termnal Black : Negatve _ termnal

CONNECTING A DC POWER SUPPLY

A DC power supplyAC outlet

AC cable

30 A fuses

Supplied DC power cable

13.8 V; at least 23 A

_+

Transceiver

To DC powersocket

GND

BlackRed

External antenna tuner connectionCONNECTING THE AH-4

The AH-4 must be connected to [ANT1].

Coaxial cable (from the AH-4)

[ANT1]

Control cable

Transceiver

GND

AH-4

Long wire or optional AH-2b

[TUNER]GND

CONNECTING PS-126 DC POWER SUPPLY

PS-126

DC powercable

To DC power socketTransceiver

AC outlet

AC cable

GND

20


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

Linear amplifier connectionsD Connecting the IC-PW1/EURO

EXCITER1 1&2

To anantenna ACC-1

ANT

ANT2ANT1 ACC 2

INPUT1

INPUT2

REMOTE

GND

IC-PW1/EURO

AC outlet(Non-European versions : 100–120/220–240 V European version : 230 V)

Transceiver

REMOTE

Remote control cable (supplied with the IC-PW1/EURO)

ACC cable (supplied with the IC-PW1/EURO)

Be sure to connect the cableto the 7-pin ACC 2 jack.

Coaxial cable(supplied with the IC-PW1/EURO)

Coaxial cable*

*Purchase separately

Connect[INPUT2]if necessary

GND

GND

D Connecting a non-Icom linear amplifier

RF OUTPUT RF INPUT

ALC

SEND

50 øcoaxialcable

Transceiver

ANT1

ALC SENDTo an antenna

Non-Icom linear amplifier

R WARNING: Set the transcever output power and lnear

amplfer ALC output level after referrng to the lnear amplfier nstructon manual.

The ALC nput level must be n the range 0 V to –4 V. The transcever does not accept postve volt-age. Non-matched ALC and RF power settngs could overheat or damage the lnear amplfier.

The maxmum sgnal level of [SEND] jack s 16 V/0.5 A DC wth ntal settng, and 250 V/ 200 mA wth “MOSFET” settng (see p. 125 for de-tals). Use an external relay unt f your non-Icom lnear amplfer requres control voltage and/or current greater than specfied.

21


Transverter jack informationWhen 2 to 13.8 V s appled to pn 6 of [ACC 2], the [X-VERTER] connector s actvated for transverter op-eraton and the antenna connectors do not receve or transmt any sgnals.

Whle recevng, the [X-VERTER] connector can be actvated as an nput termnal from an external trans-verter.

Whle transmttng, the [X-VERTER] connector out-puts sgnals of the dsplayed frequency at –20 dBm (22 mV) as sgnals for the external transverter.

FSK and AFSK (SSTV) connectionsTo connect a TNC or scan converter, etc., refer to the dagram below.

D FSK operation— when connecting to [ACC 1]

D AFSK operation

D When connecting to the [USB] connectorConnect a USB cable (thrd party’s) between the transcever’s USB connector [USB] (B) on the rear panel and the PC. (p. 19)• Icom HP (http://www.com.co.jp/world/support/ndex.html) gves the USB drver and the nstallaton gude download servce.

Transverter connector

PC

RS-232C

TNC or scan converter

• When using a PC application

• When using a TNC

1

2

3

4 5

6 78

Rear panel view

Rear panel view

RTTYGND

AF

SEND

RTTY

GND

AF

SEND

RTTY OUTPUT

GND

AUDIO INPUT

PTT

RTTY OUTPUT

GND

AUDIO INPUT

PTT1

2

3

4 5

6 78

Connect to serial port, parallel port, speaker jack, microphone jack and line IN/OUT jack, etc.See the instruction manual of the application for details.

Connect to serial port, parallel port, speaker jack, microphone jack and line IN/OUT jack, etc.See the instruction manual of the application for details.

• When connecting to [ACC 1]

• When connecting to [MIC]

• When using a PC application

• When using a TNC

PC

RS-232CTNC or scan converter

PTT

Audio output

AF inputGND

AFSK output

AF input

GND

PTT*

SQL input†

*When using the VOX function, no need to connect. Refer to the instruction manual of the external equipment (TNC, etc.).†When connecting the squelch line, consult the necessary manual (TNC, etc.).

q

w

er

t

y

u

i

1

2

3

4 5

6 78

z

z

x

x

c

c

v

v*

z

x

c

v

z

x

c

v

b

b

n†

n†

b

n†

Rear panel view

Front panel view

22


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

Microphone connector information(Front panel vew)

y GND (PTT ground)

t PTT

r Main readout squelch switch

q Microphone input

w +8 V DC output

e Frequency up/down

i Main readout AF output (varies with [AF])

GND(Microphone ground)

u

[MIC]Pin No.

FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

w +8 V DC output Max. 10 mA

eFrequency up Ground

Frequency down Ground through 470 ˘

rSquelch open “Low” level

Squelch closed “Hgh” level

CAUTION: DO NOT short pn 2 to ground as ths can damage the nternal 8 V regulator. DC voltage s appled to pn 1 for mcrophone operaton. Use cauton when usng a non-Icom mcrophone.

MicrophonesD HM-36

q

w

q

wr

e

D SM-50 (Opton)

q

w

q

wr

e

q UP/DOWN SWITCHES [UP]/[DN] Change the selected readout frequency or memory

channel. • Pressng a swtch contnuously changes the frequency

or memory channel number contnuously. • Whle pushng [XFC], the transmt readout frequency

can be controlled whle n splt frequency operaton. • The [UP]/[DN] swtch can smulate a key paddle. Preset

n the keyer set mode. (p. 45)

w PTT SWITCH Push and hold to transmt; release to receve.

e PTT LOCK SWITCH (avalable for SM-50 only) Push to toggle between transmt and receve.

r LOW CUT SWITCH (avalable for SM-50 only) Push to cut out the low frequency components of

nput voce sgnals.

23


Accessory connector informationACC 1 PIN No. NAME DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATIONS

1

2

34 5

6 78

1 RTTY Controls RTTY keyng“Hgh” level“Low” levelOutput current

: More than 2.4 V: Less than 0.6 V: Less than 2 mA

2 GND Connects to ground. Connected n parallel wth ACC 2 pn 2.

3 SENDInput/output pn.Goes to ground when transmttng.When grounded, transmts.

Ground levelOutput currentInput current (Tx)

: –0.5 V to 0.8 V: Less than 20 mA: Less than 200 mA

Connected n parallel wth ACC 2 pn 3.

4 MODModulator nput.Connects to a modulator

Input mpedanceInput level

: 10 k˘: Approx. 100 mV rms

5 AFAF detector output.Fxed, regardless of [AF] poston n default settngs. (see notes below)

Output mpedanceOutput level

: 4.7 k˘: 100–300 mV rms

6 SQLSSquelch output.Goes to ground when squelch opens.

SQL openSQL closed

: Less than 0.3 V/5 mA: More than 6.0 V/100 µA

7 13.8 V 13.8 V output when power s ON.Output current : Max. 1 A


8 ALC ALC voltage nput.Control voltageInput mpedance

: –4 V to 0 V: More than 10 k˘


ACC 2 PIN No. NAME DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATIONS

1

2

34 5

6 7

1 8 V Regulated 8 V output.Output voltageOutput current

: 8.0 V ±0.3 V: Less than 10 mA

2 GND Same as ACC 1 pn 2.

3 SEND Same as ACC 1 pn 3.

4 BANDBand voltage output.(Vares wth amateur band)

Output voltage : 0 to 8.0 V

5 ALC Same as ACC 1 pn 8.

6 TRVActvates [X-VERTER] nput/output when “HIGH” voltage s appled.

Input mpedanceInput voltage

: More than 10 k˘: 2 to 13.8 V

7 13.8 V Same as ACC 1 pn 7.

NOTE: If the CW sdetone level lmt or beep level lmt s n use, the CW sdetone or beep tone de-creases from the fxed level when the [AF] control s rotated above a specfied level. (p. 123)

24


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

Before first applying powerBefore frst applyng power, make sure all connec-tons requred for your system are complete by refer-rng to Chapter 2.

After all connectons have been done, set controls and swtches as shown n the fgure below.

TWIN-PBT

RIT/ TX

NOTCH CW PITCH

VOICE MEMORY

BAL NR

AF RF/SQL


TIMER

PHONES

ELEC-KEY

MIC

AUTOTUNE

GENE F-INP

1.8 3.51 2

14 5 18 6

7 3

24 8 28 9

50 0 ENT

4

7

10

21

CHANGE

TSXFC

SPLIT

DUALWATCH

MAIN/SUB

M.SCOPE VFO/MEMO

MP-W

MW

MP-R

F-6F-5F-4F-3F-2F-1

NRNB


POWER

RIT CLEARTX




[NOTCH]: 12 o’clock

[NR]: Max. CCW

[RF POWER]: Max. CW

[BK-IN DELAY]: 12 o’clock

[KEY SPEED]: 10–12 o’clock

[MIC GAIN]: 12 o’clock

[BAL]: 12 o’clock

[AF]: Max. CCW

[RF/SQL]: 12 o’clock

[CW PITCH]: 12 o’clock

: Max. clockwise: Max. counterclockwise

CWCCW

Applying power (CPU resetting)First applying power:Reset the transcever usng the followng procedure.

Resettng CLEARS all programmed contents n memory channels and returns programmed values n set mode to default values.

q Make sure the transcever power s OFF.w Whle pushng and holdng [F-INP ENT] and [MW],

push [POWER] to turn power ON. • The CPU s reset. • The CPU start-up takes approx. 5 sec. • The transcever dsplays ts ntal VFO frequences

when resettng s complete.e Change the set mode settngs after resettng, f

desred.

Normal applying power:Push [POWER] to turn power ON, then check the ds-play. When any of ndcators appear, turn them OFF f necessary. (See the approprate page for detals.)

POWER F-INP ENT MW

3

25

BASIC OPERATION

26

3BASIC OPERATION

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

Selecting VFO/memory mode Push [VFO/MEMO] to swtch between VFO and

memory modes. • “VFO” appears when n VFO mode, or the selected

memory channel number appears when n memory mode.

• Pushng and holdng [VFO/MEMO] for 1 sec. transfers the contents of the selected memory channel to VFO mode. (p. 102)

Main/Sub band selectionThe IC-7600 has the man and sub band.The man band s dsplayed on the left hand sde, and the sub band s dsplayed on the rght hand sde of the LCD. Some functons can only be appled to the selected band and transmsson occurs on the man band (except durng splt frequency operaton).

Push [MAIN/SUB M.SCOPE] to select access to the man or sub band readout.

• The selected readout frequency s dsplayed clearly. The sub readout functons only durng splt operaton or dualwatch.

D Main/Sub band switching Push [CHANGE] to swtch the frequency and

selected memory channel between man and sub readouts.

• Swtches between transmt frequency and receve fre-quency when the splt frequency functon s ON. (p. 88)

D Main/Sub band equalization Push and hold [CHANGE] for 1 sec. to equalzes

the sub band readout to the man band readout.

VFO/MEMO

MAIN/SUB

M.SCOPEM.SCOPE

CHANGE

“VFO” ndcator Memory channel number

Access to SUB band

MAIN band SUB band

Access to MAIN band

MAIN band SUB band

Selecting an operating bandThe trple band stackng regster provdes 3 memores for each band key, storng frequency and mode nfor-maton.

Ths functon s convenent when you operate 3 oper-atng modes on one band. For example, one regster s used for a CW frequency, another for a SSB fre-quency and the other one for a RTTY frequency.

If a band key s pushed once, the frequency and oper-atng mode last used are called up. When the key s pushed agan, another stored frequency and operat-ng mode are called up.

See the table below for a lst of the bands avalable and the default settngs for each band.

Band keys

BAND REGISTER 1 REGISTER 2 REGISTER 3

1.8 MHz 1.900000 MHz CW 1.910000 MHz CW 1.915000 MHz CW

3.5 MHz 3.550000 MHz LSB 3.560000 MHz LSB 3.580000 MHz LSB

7 MHz 7.050000 MHz LSB 7.060000 MHz LSB 7.020000 MHz CW

10 MHz 10.120000 MHz CW 10.130000 MHz CW 10.140000 MHz CW

14 MHz 14.100000 MHz USB 14.200000 MHz USB 14.050000 MHz CW

18 MHz 18.100000 MHz USB 18.130000 MHz USB 18.150000 MHz USB




50 MHz 50.100000 MHz USB 50.200000 MHz USB 51.000000 MHz FM

General 15.000000 MHz USB 15.100000 MHz USB 15.200000 MHz USB

D Using the band stacking registers[Example]: 14 MHz band

q Push [14 5], then select a frequency and an oper-atng mode.

• The prevously selected frequency and an operatng mode are memorzed n frst band stackng regster of that band.

w Push [14 5] agan, then select another frequency and operatng mode.

• The frequency and operatng mode that s selected n step q are memorzed n 14 MHz frst band stackng regster.

e Push [14 5] agan, then select another frequency and operatng mode.

• The frequency and operatng mode that s selected n step w are memorzed n 14 MHz second band stack-ng regster.

r Push [14 5] agan, then select another frequency and operatng mode.

• The frequency and operatng mode that s selected n step e are memorzed n 14 MHz thrd band stackng regster.

• When [14 5] s pushed agan, the frst band stackng regster set n step w, s over wrtten.

GENE F-INP

1.8 3.51 2

14 5 18 6

7 3

24 8 28 9

50 0 ENT

4

7

10

21

27

3 BASIC OPERATION

Frequency settingThe transcever has several tunng methods for con-venent frequency tunng.

D Tuning with the main dialq Push the desred band key on the keypad 1–3

tmes. • 3 dfferent frequences can be selected on each band

wth the band key. (See prevous page “Usng the band stackng regsters.”)

w Rotate the man dal to set the desred frequency.

If the dal lock functon s actvated, the lock ndca-tor lghts, and the man dal does not functon.In ths case, push and hold [SPEECH/LOCK] for 1 sec. to deactvate the lock functon. (p. 82)When “LOCK/SPEECH” s selected n “[SPEECH/LOCK] Swtch” tem n others set mode, pushng [SPEECH/LOCK] deactvates the lock functon. (see p. 131 for detals)

D Direct frequency entry with the keypad The transcever has a keypad for drect frequency entry as descrbed below.

q Push [F-INP ENT]. • “ ” ndcator appears.w Input the desred frequency. • Push [GENE •] to nput “. (decmal pont)” between the

MHz unts and kHz unts.e Push [F-INP ENT] to set the nput frequency. • To cancel the nput, push [EXIT/SET].

Main dial

Band keys

Keypad

1.8 1 3.5 2F-INP ENT F-INP ENT 10 4 GEN • 50 0 14 5

1.8 1 21 7F-INP ENT F-INP ENT 24 8 GEN • 50 0 3.5 2 14 5

50 0F-INP ENT 50 0 F-INP ENT GEN • 21 7 18 6

10 4F-INP ENT F-INP ENT GEN • 3.5 2 14 5

1.8 1F-INP ENT F-INP ENT GEN •14 5

F-INP ENT F-INP ENT 21 7

[EXAMPLE]14.025 MHz

18.0725 MHz

706 kHz

5.100 MHz

7.000 MHz

21.280 MHz 21.245 MHz

28

3BASIC OPERATION

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

D About 5 MHz band operation (USA version only)Operaton on the 5 MHz band s allowed on 5 dscrete frequences and must adhere to the followng:• USB mode• Maxmum of 50 watts ERP (Effectve Radated Power)• 2.8 kHz bandwdth

It’s your responsblty to set all controls so that trans-msson n ths band meets the strngent condtons under whch amateur operatons may use these fre-quences.

NOTE: We recommend that you store these fre-quences, mode and flter settngs nto memory channels for easy recall.

* The FCC specfes center frequences on the 5 MHz band. However, the IC-7600 dsplays car-rer frequency. Therefore, tune the transcever to 1.5 kHz below the specfed FCC channel center frequency.

D Quick tuning stepThe operatng frequency can be changed n larger steps (0.1, 1, 5, 9, 10, 12.5, 20 or 25 kHz selectable) for quck tunng.

q Push [TS] to turn the quck tunng functon ON. • “Z” appears when the quck tunng functon s ON.w Rotate the man dal to change the frequency n

programmed kHz steps.e Push [TS] agan to turn the quck tunng functon

OFF. • “Z” dsappears.r Rotate the man dal for normal tunng f desred.

D Selecting “kHz” step q Push [TS] to turn the quck tunng functon ON. • “Z” appears when the quck tunng functon ON.w Push and hold [TS] for 1 sec. to enter quck tunng

step set mode. • Selected tunng steps for all modes appear.e Select the desred operatng mode.r Rotate the man dal to select the desred tunng

step. • Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to return to the

default settng, f desred.t Repeat steps e and r to select quck tunng steps

for other modes, f desred.y Push [EXIT/SET] to ext the settng dsplay.

NOTE: When enterng quck tunng step set mode, the quck tunng functon must be actvated frst.

IC-7600 DisplayedFrequency*

FCC ChannelCenter Frequency*

5.33050 MHz 5.33200 MHz

5.34650 MHz 5.34800 MHz

5.36650 MHz 5.36800 MHz

5.37150 MHz 5.37300 MHz

5.40350 MHz 5.40500 MHz

To assst you n operatng the 5 MHz band wthn the rules specfed by the FCC, transmsson s llegal on any 5 MHz band frequency other than the five frequences ndcated n the table above.

Main dial

TS

Main dial

TS

Mode selection

F-4

EXIT/SET

DEF

Quck tunng ndcator

29

3 BASIC OPERATION

D Selecting 1 Hz stepA mnmum tunng step of 1 Hz can be used for fne tunng.

q Push [TS] to turn the quck tunng functon OFF.w Push and hold [TS] for 1 sec. to turn the 1 Hz tun-

ng step ON and OFF.

NOTE:• RIT and/or ∂TX also functons n 1 Hz tunng step

when used.• The frequency s changed n 50 Hz step when the

[UP]/[DN] swtches of the mcrophone are used for the frequency settng (when the programma-ble tunng step s not selected.)

D Auto tuning step functionWhen rotatng the man dal rapdly, the tunng speed accelerates automatcally as selected.

q Push [EXIT/SET] several tmes to close a mult-functon screen, f necessary.

w Push [SET] (F-6) to select set mode menu screen. • Pushng and holdng [EXIT/SET] for 1 sec. also selects

set mode menu screen.e Push [OTHERS] (F-5) to enter others set mode.r Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select “MAIN DIAL

Auto TS.”t Rotate the man dal to select the desred condton

from HIGH, LOW and OFF. • HIGH : Approx. 5 tmes faster when the tun-

ng step s set to 1 kHz or smaller steps; approx. 2 tmes faster when the tunng step s set to 5 kHz or larger steps.

• LOW : Approx. 2 tmes faster • OFF : Auto tunng step s turned OFF.y Push [EXIT/SET] to ext the set mode.

D 1⁄4 tuning step functionWhen operatng n SSB data, CW, RTTY or PSK, the 1⁄4 tunng functon s avalable. Dal rotaton s reduced to 1⁄4 of normal speed when the 1⁄4 tunng functon s ON for fner tunng control.

Push [1/4] (MF7) to toggle the 1⁄4 tunng functon ON and OFF.

• “ ” appears when the 1⁄4 tunng functon s ON.

TS

Main dialF-1 F-2

F-6

EXIT/SET

SET

F-5

OTHERS

1 ⁄ 4

¼ tuning step OFF ¼ tuning step ON

1 Hz step ndcator

HIGH (default)

30

3BASIC OPERATION

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

D Band edge warning beepWhen you tune nsde or outsde of an amateur band’s frequency range, a warnng beep sounds. (“ ” may be ndcated on outsde of an amateur band’s fre-quency.) (p. 14)Ths functon can be turned OFF n set mode, f desred.



set mode menu screen.e Push [OTHERS] (F-5) to enter others set mode.r Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select “Beep (Band

Edge).” t Rotate the man dal to select the band edge warn-

ng beep functon.y Push [EXIT/SET] to ext the set mode.

The beep output level can be set n level set mode. (p. 123)

When the band edge warning beep is set to “ON”:The band edge warnng beep sounds (enter: P, ext: Bu) accordng to the set mode settng as follows.• ON (Default) Band edge beep sounds when an operatng frequency

enters or exts the default amateur band. (default)• ON (User) A beep sounds when an operatng frequency enters or

exts an amateur band that s set n band edge screen.• ON (User) & TX Limit Same as the settng of “ON (User).” However, the

transmsson can be made n the set frequency range only.

To programming the band edge:When “ON (User)” or “ON (User) & TX Lmt” s selected, [BAND] appears n the dsplay above the functon swtch (F-5), and up to 30 band edge fre-quences can be set n band edge screen.

q Perform the steps q to t as above, then select “ON (User)” or “ON (User) & TX Lmt.”

w Push [BAND] (F-5) to enter the band edge screen.e Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desred

band edge. • Push [Ω ≈] (F-3) to select the set content for band

edge, lower or upper. • Push [INS] (MF6) to nsert a new blank band edge lne. • Push and hold [DEL] (MF7) for 1 sec. to delete the

selected band edge lne. • Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to dsplay the

band edge ntalze screen. Then, push and hold [OK] (F-5) to ntalze all band edge frequency settngs.

r Input the desred frequency wth the keypad. • Push [GENE •] to nput “. (decmal pont)” between the

MHz unts and kHz unts. • Program the frequency n ascendng order. • The frequency that s duplcated or out of an amateur

band cannot be programmed.t Push [EXIT/SET] to ext the set mode.

When the transverter functon s n use, the band edge warnng beep sounds wth the default settng.

Main dialF-1 F-2

F-6

EXIT/SET

SET

F-5

OTHERS

Main dialEXIT/SET

F-5

F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4

DEF

[INS][DEL] KeypadOK/BAND

• Band edge screen

NOTE: All frequency ranges are set n default. So you should delete or change t to add the desred band edge frequency.

ON (Default) (default)

31

3 BASIC OPERATION

ON (User)

Appears

Operating mode selectionSSB (USB/LSB), SSB data (USB data/LSB data), CW, CW reverse (CW-R), RTTY, RTTY reverse (RTTY-R), PSK, PSK reverse (PSK-R), AM, AM data, FM and FM data modes are avalable n the IC-7600. Push the desred mode swtch to select a mode of operaton.

See the dagram as at rght for the order of selecton.

Mcrophone sgnals are muted when data mode s selected dependng on the set mode settngs (p. 124).

• Selecting SSB mode Push [SSB] to select USB or LSB. • USB s selected frst when above 10 MHz; or LSB s

selected frst when below 10 MHz operaton. • After USB or LSB s selected, push [SSB] to toggle

between USB and LSB. • After USB or LSB s selected, push and hold [SSB] for

1 sec. to select USB or LSB data mode, respectvely. • After USB or LSB data mode s selected, push and hold

[SSB] for 1 sec. to select data 1, 2 and 3, n sequence. • In USB or LSB data mode, push [SSB] to return to

USB or LSB mode, respectvely.

• Selecting CW mode Push [CW] to select CW. • After CW s selected, push [CW] to toggle between CW

and CW reverse mode.

• Selecting RTTY/PSK mode Push [RTTY/PSK] to select RTTY or PSK. • After RTTY or PSK s selected, push [RTTY/PSK] to

toggle between RTTY and PSK. • After RTTY or PSK s selected, push and hold

[RTTY/PSK] for 1 sec. to toggle between RTTY and RTTY reverse, or, PSK and PSK reverse mode, respectvely.

• Selecting AM/FM mode Push [AM/FM] to select AM or FM. • After AM or FM s selected, push [AM/FM] to toggle

between AM and FM. • After AM or FM s selected, push and hold [AM/FM] for

1 sec. to select AM or FM data mode, respectvely. • After AM or FM data mode s selected, push and

hold [AM/FM] for 1 sec. to select data 1, 2 and 3, n sequence.

• In AM or FM data mode, push [AM/FM] to return to AM or FM mode, respectvely.

Mode switches

USB

CW

AM

LSB

CW-R

RTTY-R RTTY PSK PSK-R

FM

USB-D1

USB-D2

USB-D3

LSB-D1

LSB-D2

LSB-D3

AM-D1

AM-D2

AM-D3

FM-D1

FM-D2

FM-D3

SSB

CW

RTTY/PSK

AM/FM

: Push mode switch momentary.: Push and hold mode switch for 1 sec.

32

3BASIC OPERATION

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

Squelch and receive (RF) sensitivityAdjusts the RF gan and squelch threshold level. The squelch removes nose output from the speaker (closed poston) when no sgnal s receved.• The squelch s partcularly effectve for AM and FM. It s

also avalable for other modes.• 12 to 1 o’clock poston s recommended for any settng of

the [RF/SQL] control.• The control can be set as ‘Auto’ (RF gan control n SSB,

CW, RTTY and PSK; squelch control n AM and FM) or squelch control (RF gan s fxed at maxmum) n others set mode as follows. (p. 128)

SET MODE OPERATION

RF+SQL(default)

Can be used n all modes.Functons as nose squelch or S-meter squelch n FM modes; S-meter squelch only n other modes.

SQLOperates as a squelch control.• RF gan s fixed at maxmum senstvty.

AUTO

Operates as an RF gan control n SSB, CW, RTTY and PSK modes.• Squelch s fixed open.Operates as a squelch control n AM and FM modes.• RF gan s fixed at maxmum senstvty.

Adjusting RF gain (Receve senstvty)Normally, [RF/SQL] s set to the 11 o’clock poston.Rotate [RF/SQL] to the 11 o’clock poston for max-mum senstvty.• Rotatng counterclockwse from the maxmum poston

reduces senstvty.• The S-meter ndcates receve senstvty.

Adjusting squelch (Removng non-sgnal nose)Rotate [RF/SQL] clockwse when recevng no sgnal, untl the nose just dsappears.• [RX] ndcator lght goes out.• Rotatng [RF/SQL] past the threshold pont nvokes the S-

meter squelch— ths allows you to set a mnmum sgnal level needed to open the squelch.

[RF/SQL]

• When setting as RF gain/squelch control

Maximum RF gain

S-meter squelch


Squelch is open.

RF gain adjustablerange

Recommended level

• When functioning as RF gain control (Squelch s fxed open; SSB, CW, RTTY, PSK only)

Minimum RF gain

Adjustablerange

Maximum RF gain

• When functioning as squelch control (RF gan s fxed at maxmum.)

Squelch is open.

S-meter squelch

S-meter squelchthreshold

Noise squelch threshold (FM mode)

Shallow Deep


Whle rotatng the RF gan control, nose may be heard. Ths comes from the DSP unt and does not ndcate an equpment malfuncton.

33

3 BASIC OPERATION

Volume setting Rotate [AF] control clockwse to ncrease, counter-

clockwse to decrease the audo output level.

Increases

Decreases

Meter indication selectionThe transcever has 6 transmt meter functons for your convenence.

Push [METER] (MF2) several tmes to select the desred meter.

Indcates the RF output power n % (per-cent).

Indcates the SWR on the transmsson lne.

Indcates the ALC level. When the meter movement shows the nput sgnal level exceeds the allowable level, the ALC lmts the RF power. In such cases, reduce the [MIC GAIN] control.

Indcates the compresson level when the speech compressor s n use.

Indcates the dran current of the fnal amplfer MOSFETs.

Indcates the dran termnal voltage of the fnal amplfer MOSFETs.

D Multi-function digital meterThe IC-7600 can dsplay the mult-functon dgtal meter on the LCD dsplay. Ths meter dsplays all transmt parameters smultaneously.

q Push and hold [METER] (MF2) for 1 sec. to turn the mult-functon dgtal meter ON.

w Push [P-HOLD] (F-1) to toggle the peak level hold functon ON.

• “ P-HOLD” appears on the wndow ttle when the peak level hold functon s ON.

e Push and hold [METER] (MF2) for 1 sec., or push [EXIT/SET] to turn the mult-functon dgtal meter OFF.

[AF]

METER

Power level readout SWR readout

ALC level readout Compression levelreadout

ID readout VD readout

F-1

P-HOLD

METER EXIT/SET

“P-HOLD” ndcator

34

3BASIC OPERATION

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

D Meter type selectionA total of 3 meter types are avalable n the IC-7600— Standard, Edgewse and Bar meters. Follow the nstructons below for the meter type selec-ton.

q Push [EXIT/SET] several tmes to return to normal screen, f necessary.

w Push [SET] (F-6), then push [DISP] (F-3) to select dsplay set mode.

e Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select “Meter type (Normal Screen)” tem.

r Rotate the man dal to select the desred meter type from “Standard,” “Edgewse” and “Bar.”

t Push [EXIT/SET] to ext dsplay set mode.

Voice synthesizer operationThe IC-7600 has a bult-n voce syntheszer to announce the operatng frequency, mode* and S-meter* n clear, electroncally-generated voce, n Englsh (or Japanese).

Select the desred parameters to be announced, such as audo level, speed, language, contents, n the oth-ers set mode n advance. (p. 131)

Push [SPEECH/LOCK] to announce the currently selected frequency, mode* and S-meter level*.

Push a mode swtch to announce the approprate mode*.

* The S-meter level and operatng mode announcements can be deactvated, respectvely. (p.131)

NOTE: When “LOCK/SPEECH” s selected n [[SPEECH/LOCK] Swtch] tem n others set mode, pushng and holdng [SPEECH/LOCK] actvates the voce syntheszer. (p. 131)

Main dialF-1 F-2

F-6

EXIT/SET

SET

F-3

DISP

• Standard meter

• Edgewise meter

• Bar meter

SPEECHLOCK

35

3 BASIC OPERATION

Basic transmit operation

Before transmitting, monitor your selected operating frequency to make sure transmitting won’t cause interference to other stations on the same frequency. It’s good amateur practice to listen first, and then, even if nothing is heard, ask “Is the frequency in use?” once or twice, before you begin operating on that frequency.

D Transmitting Before transmttng, montor your selected operat-ng frequency to make sure transmttng won’t cause nterference to other statons on the same frequency.

q Push [TRANSMIT] or [PTT] (mcrophone) to trans-mt.

• The [TX] ndcator lghts red. • “ ” appears whle transmttng.w Push [TRANSMIT] agan or release [PTT] (mcro-

phone) to return to receve.

Adjusting the transmit output power Rotate [RF POWER]. • Adjustable range : 2 W to 100 W

(AM mode: 1 W to 30 W)Increasesmax. 100 W(30 W for AM)

Decreasesmin. 2 W(1 W for AM)

Push

D Microphone gain adjustment Before transmttng, montor your selected operat-ng frequency to make sure transmttng won’t cause nterference to other statons on the same frequency.

q Push [SSB] to select SSB mode.w Push [METER] (MF2) to select the ALC meter.e Push [PTT] (mcrophone) to transmt. • Talk nto the mcrophone at your normal voce level.r Whle talkng nto the mcrophone, rotate

[MIC GAIN] so that the ALC meter readng doesn’t go outsde the ALC zone. (see at rght)

MIC GAIN

Recommended level for an Icom microphone

Increases

DecreasesPush

t Release [PTT] (mcrophone) to return to receve.

In addton, the transcever can dsplay the mult-func-ton dgtal meter n the LCD, whch dsplays all trans-mt meters smultaneously.

[RF POWER]

TRANSMIT [TX] indicator

[MIC GAIN]

METER

SSB

ALC zone

36

3BASIC OPERATION

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

D Drive gain adjustmentThe drve gan s actve for all modes other than SSB mode wth speech compressor OFF.

Before transmttng, montor your selected operat-ng frequency to make sure transmttng won’t cause nterference to other statons on the same frequency.

q Push [EXIT/SET] several tmes to return to normal screen, f necessary.

w Push [SET] (F-6), then push [LEVEL] (F-1) to select level set mode.

e Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select “Drve Gan” tem.

r Push [METER] (MF2) to select the ALC meter.t Push [PTT] (mcrophone; SSB wth [COMP] ON,

AM or FM), key down (CW) or push [TRANSMIT] (RTTY or PSK) to transmt.

y Whle talkng nto the mcrophone, keyng down or transmttng, rotate the man dal so that the ALC meter readng s wthn 30% to 50% of the ALC scale. (p. 36)

• Talk nto the mcrophone at your normal voce level.u Release [PTT], stop keyng or push [TRANSMIT]

agan to return to receve.i Push [EXIT/SET] to ext dsplay set mode.

Main dialF-1 F-2

F-6

EXIT/SET

SET

METERTRANSMIT

LEVEL /

Drive gain range

37

3 BASIC OPERATION

Functions for CW operationD About CW reverse modeCW-R (CW Reverse) mode uses the opposte sde band to receve CW sgnals.Use when nterferng sgnals are near a desred sg-nal and you want to use CW-R to reduce the nterfer-ence.

Durng CW mode, push [CW] to select CW and CW-R mode.

D About CW pitch controlThe receved CW audo ptch and CW sdetone can be adjusted to sut your preference (from 300 to 900 Hz; n 5 Hz steps). Ths does not change the operatng frequency.

Rotate [CW PITCH] to sut your preference. • Adjustable wthn 300 to 900 Hz.

The flter set screen graphcally dsplays the CW ptch operatons. (See at rght.) Push and hold [FILTER] for 1 sec. to access the

flter set screen. • The CW ptch frequency s graphcally changed n

5 Hz steps when the selected IF flter passband wdth s below 500Hz (“ ” appears), or n 25 Hz steps when the selected IF flter passband wdth s above 600Hz (“ ” dsappears).

• Push [EXIT/SET] or push and hold [FILTER] for 1 sec. to return to the prevous screen.

D CW sidetone functionWhen the transcever s n receve (and the break-n functon s OFF— p. 85) you can lsten to the CW sd-etone wthout actually transmttng.

Ths allows you to match your transmt frequency exactly to another staton’s by matchng the audo tone. You can also use the CW sdetone (be sure to turn OFF break-n!) to practce CW sendng.CW sdetone level can be adjusted n level set mode (p. 122).

q Push [SET] (F-6), then push [LEVEL] (F-1) to select level set mode.

w Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select “Sde Tone Level” tem.

eRotate the man dal to adjust the sdetone level. • Sdetone level s adjustable wthn 0 to 100 % n 1%

steps.r Push [EXIT/SET] to ext dsplay set mode.

Matchng the frequency of a transmtted and receved sgnal s called “Zero beat.”

Push

BFO

CW-R mode (USB side)

BFO

Desired signal

CW mode (LSB side)

Interference Desired signalInterference

[CW PITCH]

Lower frequency

Higher frequency

• Filter set screen

CW pitch frequency (e.g. 700 Hz)

Main dialF-1 F-2 F-6 EXIT/SET

SETLEVEL /

4

38

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

D APF (Audio Peak Filter) operationThe APF changes the audo frequency response by boostng a partcular frequency to enhance a desred CW sgnal.

q Durng CW mode, push [APF/TPF] to turn the audo peak flter ON and OFF.

• “ ” appears n the dsplay and the ndcator on ths swtch lghts green when the audo peak flter s ON.

w Push and hold [APF/TPF] for 1 sec. several tmes to select the desred audo flter wdth.

• WIDE, MID and NAR flters, or 320, 160 and 80 Hz fl-ters are avalable dependng on [APF type] tem settng n other set mode. (p. 133)

The APF (Audo Peak Flter) type s also selectable from “SOFT” and “SHARP” n [APF type] tem n oth-ers set mode (p. 133).

APF/TPF

39

4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

40

4RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

Electronic keyer functionsThe IC-7600 has a number of convenent functons for the bult-n electronc keyer that can be accessed from the memory keyer menu.

q Durng CW mode, push [EXIT/SET] several tmes to return to normal screen, f necessary.

w Push [KEYER] (F-3) to select memory keyer screen.

e Push [EXIT/SET] to select memory keyer menu screen.

r Push [SEND] (F-1), [EDIT] (F-2), [001] (F-3) or [CW KEY] (F-4) to select the desred menu. See the dagram below.

• Push [EXIT/SET] to return to the prevous dsplay. F-1 F-2 F-4

F-3

EXIT/SET

CW KEYEDITSEND

001KEYER /

• Memory keyer screen (p. 41)

• Memory keyer menu screen

• Memory keyer edit screen (p. 42)

• Contest number set mode (p. 43)

• Keyer set mode screen (p. 44)

F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6

F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6

F-1 F-2

F-3

F-4

EXIT/SET

D Memory keyer screenPre-set characters can be sent usng the keyer send menu. Contents of the memory keyer are set usng the edt menu.

• Transmittingq Durng CW mode operaton, push [KEYER] (F-3)

to select memory keyer screen.w Push [TRANSMIT] to set the transcever to trans-

mt, or set the break-n functon ON (p. 85).e Push one of the functon keys ([M1] (F-1) to [M4]

(F-4)) to send the contents of the memory keyer. • Push and hold a functon key that s pushed n step q

for 1 sec., or push [REPEAT] (F-6) whle sendng the contents of the memory keyer to send repeatedly; push any functon key except for to cancel the transmsson.

• “ ” appears whle transmttng repeatedly. • The contest seral number counter counts each tme

the contents are sent. • Push [−1] (F-5) to reduce the contest seral number

count by 1 before sendng the contents of the memory keyer to a staton a second tme.

• “M1”–“M4” are hghlghted whle transmttng. • Set the repeat nterval of the memory keyer to 1–60

sec. (1 sec. steps). See p. 44 for keyer set mode.r Push [EXIT/SET] twce to return to normal screen.

For your informationWhen an external keypad s connected to [MIC] con-nector on the front panel, or one of [F1]−[F4] key of the keyboard that s connected to the [USB] (A) connector on the front panel s pushed, the pro-grammed contents, M1—M4, can be transmtted wthout selectng the memory keyer screen.See pgs. 18, 133, 134 for detals.

F-3 F-5

EXIT/SET

−1KEYER

TRANSMIT

F-4

M4

F-1

M1—

• Memory keyer screenCount up trigger

Durng transmttng:

Appears while transmitting.

Appears while transmitting repeatedly.

41


D Editing a memory keyerThe contents of the memory keyer memores can be set usng the memory keyer edt menu. The memory keyer can memorze and re-transmt 4 CW key codes for often-used CW sentences, contest seral numbers, etc. Total capacty of the memory keyer s 70 charac-ters per memory channel.

• Programming contentsq Durng CW mode operaton, push [KEYER] (F-3)

to select memory keyer screen.w Push [EXIT/SET] to select memory keyer menu,

then push [EDIT] (F-2) to select keyer edt screen. • Memory keyer contents of Channel 1 (M1) s selected.e Push [M1..M4] (F-6) several tmes to select the

desred memory keyer channel to be edted.r Push [ABC] (MF6) or [123]/[Symbol] (MF7) to

select the character group, then rotate the man dal to select the character, or push the keypad for number nput.

• [Symbol] appears when [123] (MF7) s pushed when “123” character group s selected.

• Selectable characters (usng the man dal);

Key selection Characters

A to Z (captal letters)

0 to 9 (numbers)

/ ? ^ . , @

NOTE:“^” s used to transmt a strng of characters wth no nter-character space. Put “^” before a text strng such as ^AR, and the strng “ar ” s sent wth no space.“” s used to nsert the CW contest seral num-ber. The seral number automatcally ncrements by 1. Ths functon s avalable only for one memory keyer channel at a tme. Memory keyer channel M2 used “” by default.

t Push [Ω] (F-1) or [≈] (F-2) to move the cursor backwards or forwards, respectvely.

• Pushng [DEL] (F-3) deletes a character and [SPACE] (F-4) nserts a space.

y Repeat steps r and t to nput the desred char-acters.

u Push [EXIT/SET] twce to return to normal screen.

For your convenienceWhen a PC keyboard s connected to [USB] (A) con-nector on the front panel, the memory keyer contents can also be edted from the keyboard.

F-2

F-6

EXIT/SET

EDIT

F-3

KEYER

M1..M4

F-1 F-2 F-4 Main dial

Symbol ABC

123

F-3

DEL SPACE

Keypad

• Memory keyer edit screen

• Example— entered “QSL TU DE JA3YUA TEST” into memory keyer channel 3

• Pre-programmed contents

CH ContentsM1 CQ TEST CQ TEST DE ICOM ICOM TESTM2 UR 5NN BKM3 CFM TUM4 QRZ?

42


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

D Contest number set modeThs menu s used to set the contest (seral) number and count-up trgger, etc.

• Setting contentsq Durng CW mode operaton, push [KEYER] (F-3)


then push [001] (F-3) to select contest seral num-ber set mode.

e Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desred set tem.

r Set the desred condton usng the man dal. • Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select the

default condton or value.t Push [EXIT/SET] twce to normal screen.

• Contest number set mode screen

Main dialF-1 F-2

F-4

EXIT/SET

F-3

KEYER 001/ 001CLR/DEF

Number Style Normal

Ths tem sets the numberng system used for con-test (seral) numbers— normal or short morse num-bers.

Short morse numbers are also referred to as “cut” numbers.

• Normal : Does not use short morse numbers (default)

• 190ANO : Sets 1 as A, 9 as N and 0 as O.• 190ANT : Sets 1 as A, 9 as N and 0 as T.• 90 NO : Sets 9 as N and 0 as O.• 90 NT : Sets 9 as N and 0 as T.

Count Up Trigger M2

The count-up trgger allows the contest seral num-ber to automatcally ncrement after each complete seral number exchange s sent.

• M1, M2, M3 and M4 can be set. (default: M2)

Present Number 001

Ths tem shows the current number for the count-up trgger channel set above.

• Rotate the man dal to change the number, or push and hold [001CLR] (F-4) for 1 sec. to reset the current number to 001.

43


D Keyer set modeThs set mode s used to set the memory keyer repeat tme, dash weght, paddle specficatons, keyer type, etc.

• Setting contentsq Durng CW mode operaton, push [KEYER] (F-3)


then push [CW KEY] (F-4) to select keyer set mode.


r Set the desred condton usng the man dal. • Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select the

default condton or value.t Push [EXIT/SET] twce to normal screen.

Main dialF-1 F-2 F-3 EXIT/SET

F-4

KEYER

CW KEY/DEF

• Keyer set mode screen

Keyer Repeat Time 2s

When sendng CW usng the repeat tmer, ths tem sets the tme between transmsson.

• 1 to 60 sec. n 1 sec. steps can be selected. (default: 2 sec.)

Dot/Dash Ratio 1:1:3.0

Ths tem sets the dot/dash rato.

Keying weight example: Morse code “K”

DASHWeight setting:

1:1:3 (default)

Weight setting:

Adjusted

DASH

DOT (fixed*)

Adjustable range SPACE (fixed*)

*SPACE and DOT length can be

adjusted with [KEY SPEED] only.

• 1:1:2.8 to 1:1:4.5 (n 0.1 steps) can be selected. (default: 1:1:3.0)

Rise Time 4ms

Ths tem sets the rse tme of the transmtted CW envelope.

Key action

Tx output power

• About rise time

Rise time

Tx

Rx

Set Tx power level

Time0

• 2, 4, 6, 8 or 10 msec. can be selected. (default: 4 msec.)

Key clcks on nearby frequences can be generated f the rse tme of a CW waveform s too short.

Contnues to the next page.

44


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

D Keyer set mode (contnued)

Paddle Polarity Normal

Ths tem sets the paddle dot-dash polarty. • Normal and reverse polarty can be selected.

Keyer Type ELEC-KEY

Ths tem selects the keyer type for [ELEC-KEY] connector on the front panel.

• Straght key, BUG-KEY and ELEC-KEY can be selected. (default: ELEC-KEY)

MIC Up/Down Keyer OFF

(Mcrophone’s [UP]/[DN] swtches keyer)Ths tem allows you to set the mcrophone [UP]/[DN] swtches to be used as a paddle. (The mcro-phone [UP]/[DN] swtches do not work as a ‘squeeze key.’)

• ON : [UP]/[DN] swtches can be used for CW.• OFF : [UP]/[DN] swtches cannot be used for CW.

NOTE: When “ON” s selected, the frequency and memory channel cannot be changed usng the [UP]/[DN] swtches.

45


RTTY (FSK) operationA DSP-based hgh-qualty Baudot RTTY encoder/decoder s bult-n to the IC-7600. When connectng a PC keyboard (pgs. 18, 19), RTTY operaton can be performed wthout an external RTTY termnal, TNC or PC.If you would rather use your RTTY termnal or TNC, consult the manual that comes wth the RTTY term-nal or TNC.

q Push a band key to select the desred band.w Push [RTTY/PSK] to select RTTY. • After RTTY mode s selected, push and hold

[RTTY/PSK] for 1 sec. to toggle between RTTY and RTTY-R modes.

• “RTTY” or “RTTY-R” appears. • RTTY tunng ndcator appears.e Push [DECODE] (F-3) to dsplay the decode

screen. • The IC-7600 has a bult-n Baudot decoder.r To tune the desred sgnal, am for a symmetrcal

waveform and ensure the peak ponts algn wth the mark (2125 Hz) and shft (170 Hz) frequency lnes n the FFT scope.

• The S-meter ndcates receved sgnal strength when sgnal s receved.

t Press [F12] on the connected PC’s keyboard to transmt.

• [TX] ndcator lghts red.y Type from the keyboard to enter the contents that

you want to transmt. • The typewrtten contents are ndcated n the TX buffer

screen and transmtted mmedately. • The text color wll be changed when transmtted. • Press one of [F1]–[F8] on the keyboard to transmt the

TX memory contents.u Press [F12] on the keyboard to return to receve.

For your convenienceThe transmsson contents can be typed before beng transmtted.

q Perform the steps q to r above.w Type from the connected keyboard to enter the

message that you want to transmt. • The typewrtten contents are ndcated n the TX buffer

screen.e Press [F12] of the connected keyboard to transmt

the typewrtten contents. • The color of dsplayed text, n the TX buffer screen, wll

be changed when transmtted. • To cancel the transmsson, press [F12] twce.r Press [F12] of the keyboard to return to receve.

Main dialEXIT/SET

F-3

[TX]indicator

[RX]indicator Band keys

RTTY/PSK

DECODE

AppearsAppears

2125/170

1905 2515

FFT scope

TX buffer screen

TX/RX contents screen

Water-fall

46


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

D About RTTY reverse modeReceved characters are occasonally garbled when the receved sgnal s reversed between Mark and Space tones. Ths reversal can be caused by ncor-rect TNC connectons, settng, commands, etc.

To receve a reversed RTTY sgnals correctly, select RTTY-R (RTTY Reverse) mode.

Durng RTTY mode, push and hold [RTTY/PSK] for 1 sec. to select RTTY-R mode.

• Check the receved sgnal.

D Twin peak filterThe twn peak flter changes the audo frequency response by boostng the mark and space frequen-ces (2125 and 2295 Hz) for better recepton of RTTY sgnals.

Durng RTTY mode, push [APF/TPF] to turn the twn peak flter ON and OFF.

• “ ” appears n the LCD and the ndcator on ths swtch lghts green whle the flter s n use.

NOTE: When the twn peak flter s n use, the receved audo output may ncrease. Ths s a nor-mal, not a malfuncton.

Normal Reverse

Space Mark BFO Space MarkBFO

170 Hz 2125 Hz 170 Hz2125 Hz

APF/TPF

47


D Functions for the RTTY decoder indicationq Push a band key to select the desred band.w Push [RTTY/PSK] to select RTTY. • After RTTY mode s selected, push and hold [RTTY/

PSK] for 1 sec. to toggle between RTTY and RTTY-R modes.

• “RTTY” or “RTTY-R” appears.e Push [DECODE] (F-3) to dsplay the decode

screen. • When tuned nto an RTTY sgnal, decoded characters

are dsplayed n the RX contents screen.r Push [HOLD/CLR] (F-2) to freeze the current

screen. • “ ” appears whle the functon s n use. • Push [HOLD/CLR] (F-2) agan to cancel the functon.t Push and hold [HOLD/CLR] (F-2) for 1 sec. to

clear the dsplayed characters. • “ ” ndcator dsappears at the same tme when

the hold functon s n use.y Push [WIDE] (F-6) to toggle the RTTY decode

screen sze from normal and wde. • S/RF meter type durng wde screen ndcaton can be

selected n dsplay set mode. (p. 129)u Push [EXIT/SET] to close the RTTY decode

screen.

D Setting the decoder threshold levelAdjust the RTTY decoder threshold level f some characters are dsplayed when no sgnal s receved.

q Select the RTTY decode screen as descrbed above.

w Push [ADJ] (F-4) to select the threshold level set-tng condton.

e Rotate the man dal to adjust the RTTY decoder threshold level.

• Push and hold [DEF] (F-5) for 1 sec. to select the default settng.

r Push [ADJ] (F-4) to ext from the threshold level settng condton.

The UnShft On Space (USOS) functon and new lne code can be set n the RTTY set mode. (p. 51)

EXIT/SET

F-3 F-6 Band keys

F-2 RTTY/PSK

DECODE

HOLD/CLR

WIDE

• RTTY Decode screen (Normal)

• RTTY Decode screen (Wide)

Main dialF-4 F-5

DEFADJ

Threshold level indication bar

48


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

D RTTY memory transmissionPre-set characters can be sent usng the RTTY memory. Contents of the memory are set usng the edt menu.

q Durng RTTY mode operaton, push [DECODE] (F-3) to select RTTY decode screen.

w Push [TX MEM] (F-3) to select RTTY memory screen.

e Push [1–4/5–8] (F-6) to select memory bank then push one of the functon keys ([RT1] (F-1) to [RT4] (F-4) or [RT5] (F-1) to [RT8] (F-4)).

• When no keyboard s connected, the selected memory contents wll be transmtted mmedately.

• When a keyboard s connected, the memory contents wll be transmtted mmedately when [F1] to [F8] on the connected keyboard s pressed, or transmtted after [F12] s pressed, dependng on auto transmsson/recepton settng (see below).

• The transmsson date, tme, recepton date and/or tme may be dsplayed n RX contents screen, dependng on settng.

For your information When an external keypad s connected to [MIC] con-

nector on the front panel, the programmed contents, RT1—RT4, can be transmtted. (pgs. 18, 133)

or

F-3 F-6

–F-1 F-4

RT1 RT4–

F-1 F-4

RT5 RT8

/DECODE TX MEM 1–4/5–8

• RTTY memory screen

D Automatic transmission/reception settingq Durng RTTY mode operaton, push [DECODE] (F-3)

to select RTTY decode screen.w Push [TX MEM] (F-3) to select RTTY memory

screen, then push [EDIT] (F-5) to select RTTY memory edt screen.

• RTTY memory contents of the Channel 1 (RT1) s selected.

e Push [RT1..RT8] (F-6) several tmes to select the desred RTTY memory.

r Push [AUTO TX] (F-5) several tmes to select the desred condton as follow.

• AUTO TX/RX : Automatcal ly transmts the selected memory and returns to receve after the transmsson.

• AUTO TX : Automatcally transmts the selected memory. To return to receve, press [F12] on the keyboard.

• AUTO RX : Press [F12] on the keyboard to transmt the selected memory. Automatcally returns to receve after the transmsson.

• No ndcaton : Press [F12] on the keyboard to transmt the selected memory and press [F12] agan to return to receve.

t Push [EXIT/SET] to ext RTTY memory edt cond-ton.

NOTE: The transcever always functons n the “AUTO TX/RX” settng when no keyboard s con-nected.

EXIT/SET

F-3 F-6

F-5

/DECODE TX MEM

AUTO TXEDIT /

RT1..RT8

Auto TX/RX settings

49


D Editing RTTY memoryThe contents of the RTTY memores can be set usng the memory edt menu. The memory can store and re-transmt 8 RTTY message for often-used RTTY nformaton. Total capacty of the memory s 70 char-acters per memory channel.

• Programming contentsq Durng RTTY mode operaton, push [DECODE] (F-3)

to select RTTY decode screen.w Push [TX MEM] (F-3) to select RTTY memory

screen, then push [EDIT] (F-5) to select RTTY memory edt screen.

• RTTY memory contents of the Channel 1 (RT1) s selected.

e Push [RT1..RT8] (F-6) several tmes to select the desred RTTY memory channel to be edted.

r Push [ABC] (MF6) or [123]/[Symbol] (MF7) to select the character group, then rotate the man dal to select the character, or push the keypad for number nput.

• [Symbol] (MF7) appears when [123] (MF7) s pushed when “123” character group s selected.




0 to 9 (numbers)

! $ & ? " ’ – / . , : ; ( ) ↵




u Push [EXIT/SET] to set the contents and ext RTTY memory edt screen.

For your convenience When a PC keyboard s connected to [USB] con-

nector on the front panel, the RTTY memory con-tents can also be edted from the keyboard.

EXIT/SET

F-3 F-6

F-5

/DECODE TX MEM

EDIT

RT1..RT8


Symbol ABC

123

F-3

DEL SPACE

Keypad

• RTTY memory edit screen


CH Contents

RT1 ↵DE ICOM ICOM K↵RT2 ↵DE ICOM ICOM ICOM K↵RT3 ↵QSL UR 599–599 BK↵RT4 ↵QSL DE ICOM ICOM UR 599–599 BK↵RT5 ↵73 GL SK↵RT6 ↵CQ CQ CQ DE ICOM ICOM ICOM K↵

RT7↵MY TRANSCEIVER IS IC–7600 & ANTENNA IS A 3–ELEMENT TRIBAND YAGI.↵

RT8↵MY RTTY EQUIPMENT IS INTERNAL FSK UNIT & DEMODULATOR OF THE IC–7600.↵

50


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

D RTTY decode set modeThs set mode s used to set the decode USOS func-ton, tme stamp settng, etc.

• Setting contentsq Durng RTTY mode operaton, push [DECODE] (F-3)

to select RTTY decode screen.w Push [<MENU1>] (F-1) to select the second RTTY

decode menu, then push [SET] (F-5) to select RTTY decode set mode.

• Push [WIDE] (F-6) to toggle the screen sze from nor-mal and wde.


r Set the desred condton usng the man dal. • Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select a default

condton or value. • Push [Ω ≈] (F-3) to select the set contents for some

tems.t Push [EXIT/SET] to ext from set mode.

F-1 F-2 F-4F-3

DEF

EXIT/SETF-3

F-6

F-1

F-5

Main dialDECODE<MENU1>

SET WIDE

• RTTY decode set mode screen

RTTY FFT Scope Averaging OFF

Select the FFT scope waveform averagng functon from 2 to 4 and OFF. (default: OFF)

Recommendation!If you use the FFT scope waveform for tunng, use of the default or smaller averagng settng s recom-mended.

RTTY FFT Scope Waveform Color 51 153 255

Set the color for the FFT scope waveform.• The color s set n RGB format.• The set color s ndcated n the box besde the RGB

scale.

• Push [Ω ≈] (F-3) to select R (Red), G (Green) and B (Blue), and then rotate the man dal to set the rato from 0 to 255.

RTTY Decode USOS ON

Turn the capablty of letter code decodng after recevng a “space” (USOS; UnShft On Space func-ton) ON and OFF.

• ON : Decode as letter code.• OFF : Decode as character code.

RTTY Decode New Line Code CR,LF,CR+LF

Selects the new lne code of the nternal RTTY decoder.CR: Carrage Return, LF: Lne Feed

• CR,LF,CR+LF : Makes new lne wth any codes.• CR+LF : Makes new lne wth CR+LF code

only.

RTTY Diddle BLANKSelects the dddle condton. • OFF : Turns the dddle functon OFF.

• BLANK : Transmts blank code durng no code transmsson.

• LTRS : Transmts letter code durng no code transmsson.

51


RTTY TX USOS ONExplctly nserts the FIGS character even though t s not requred by the recevng staton.

• ON : Inserts FIGS.• OFF : Does not nsert FIGS.

RTTY Auto CR+LF by TX ON

Selects the automatc new lne code (CR+LF) trans-msson capablty.

• ON : Transmts CR+LF code once.• OFF : Transmts no CR+LF code.

RTTY Time Stamp ON

Turn the tme stamp (date, transmsson or recepton tme) ndcaton ON and OFF.

• ON : Dsplays the tme stamp.• OFF : No tme stamp ndcaton.

RTTY Time Stamp (Time) Local

Selects the clock ndcaton for tme stamp usage.

NOTE: The tme won’t be dsplayed when “OFF” s selected n “RTTY Tme Stamp” as above.

• Local : Selects the tme that set n “Tme (Now).”• UTC* : Selects the tme that set n “CLOCK2.” * The name of choce may dffer accord-

ng to “CLOCK2 Name” settng (p. 115). “UTC” s the default name of CLOCK2.

RTTY Time Stamp (Frequency) OFFSelects the operatng frequency ndcaton for tme stamp usage.

NOTE: The frequency won’t be dsplayed when “OFF” s selected n “RTTY Tme Stamp” as above.

• ON : Dsplays the operatng frequency.• OFF : No operatng frequency dsplay.

RTTY Font Color (Receive) 128 255 128

Set the text color for receved characters.• The color s set n RGB format.• The set color s ndcated n the box besde the

RGB scale.


RTTY Font Color (Transmit) 255 106 106Set the text color for transmtted characters.• The color s set n RGB format.• The set color s ndcated n the box besde the

RGB scale.


RTTY Font Color (Time Stamp) 0 155 189

Set the text color for tme stamp ndcaton.• The color s set n RGB format.• The set color s ndcated n the box besde the

RGB scale.


RTTY Font Color (TX Buffer) 255 255 255

Set the text color n the TX buffer screen.• The color s set n RGB format.• The set color s ndcated n the box besde the

RGB scale.


52


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

D Data savingThe contents of the RTTY memory/receved sgnal can be saved nto the USB-Memory.

q Durng RTTY decode screen ndcaton, push [<MENU1>] (F-1) to select the RTTY decode sec-ond menu.

w Push [SAVE] (F-4) to select decode fle save screen.e Change the followng condtons f desred. • File name: z Push [EDIT] (F-4) to select fle name edt con-

dton. • Push [DIR/FILE] (F-1) several tmes to select the

fle name, f necessary. x Push [ABC] (MF6) or [123]/[Symbol] (MF7)

to select the character group, then rotate the man dal to select the character.

• [ABC] (MF6): A to Z (captal letters); [123] (MF7): 0 to 9 (numerals); [Symbol] (MF7): ! # $ % & ’ ` ^ – ( ) _

_ @ can be selected.

• Push [Ω] (F-1) to move the cursor left, push [≈] (F-2) to move the cursor rght, [DEL] (F-3) delete a character and push [SPACE] (F-4) to nsert a space.

c Push [EXIT/SET] to set the fle name. • File format z Push and hold [SAVE/OPT] (F-5) for 1 sec. to

enter save opton screen. x Rotate the man dal to select the savng for-

mat from Text to HTML. • “Text” s the default settng. • Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select the

default settng. c Push [EXIT/SET] to return to the prevous

ndcaton. • Saving location z Push [DIR/FILE] (F-1) to select tree vew

screen. x Select the desred drectory or folder n the

USB-Memory. • Push [Ω ≈] (F-4) to select the upper drectory. • Push [Y] (F-2) or [Z] (F-3) to select folder n the

same drectory. • Push and hold [Ω ≈] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select a

folder n the drectory. • Push [REN] (MF5) to rename the folder. • Push and hold [DEL] (MF6) for 1 sec. to delete

the folder. • Push and hold [MAKE] (MF7) for 1 sec. to mak-

ng a new folder. (Edt the name wth the same manner as the “• Fle name” above.)

c Push [DIR/FILE] (F-1) twce to select the fle name.

r Push [SAVE/OPT] (F-5). • After savng s completed, returns to RTTY decode sec-

ond menu automatcally.

For your convenience!Two data formats, Text and HTML, are avalable for PC data storage.

The USB-Memory s not suppled by Icom.

F-1 F-2 F-4F-3

DEL SPACE

F-1 F-4 EXIT/SET Main dial

Symbol ABC

123

SAVE EDIT/DIR/FILE<MENU1> /

• Decode file save screen— file name edit

F-4 EXIT/SET Main dialF-5

SAVE/OPTDEF

F-1 F-5

SAVE/OPT

F-4F-2 F-3

DIR/FILE

REN DELMAKE

• Save option screen

When a PC keyboard s connected to [USB] connector on the front panel, the file name can also be edted from the keyboard. In ths case, a USB hub s requred.

53


PSK operationA hgh-qualty DSP-based PSK encoder/decoder s bult-n to the IC-7600. When connectng a PC key-board (pgs. 18, 19), PSK operaton can be performed wthout PSK software nstalled on your PC.If desred, you can also use your PSK software; con-sult the manual that comes wth the software.

q Push a band key to select the desred band.w Push [RTTY/PSK] to select PSK. • After PSK mode s selected, push and hold

[RTTY/PSK] for 1 sec. to toggle between PSK and PSK-R modes.

• “PSK” or “PSK-R” appears.e Push [DECODE] (F-3) to dsplay the decode

screen. • The IC-7600 has a bult-n PSK decoder.r Tune to the desred sgnal wth the man dal. • The sgnal s properly tuned when the radated lnes

n the vector tunng ndcator narrow, as show n the example below.

• The radated lnes n the vector tunng ndcator may be dsplayed sporadcally.

• When a PSK sgnal s receved, the water-fall dsplay s actvated.

• The water-fall dsplay shows the sgnals wthn the pass-band. Receved PSK sgnals appear as vertcal lnes.

t Press [F12] of the connected keyboard to transmt. • [TX] ndcator lghts red.y Type from the connected keyboard to enter the

message that you want to transmt. • The typewrtten contents are ndcated n the TX buffer

screen and transmtted mmedately. • The text color wll be changed when transmtted. • Press one of [F1]–[F8] to transmt the TX memory con-

tents.u Press [F12] of the keyboard to return to receve.

For your convenienceThe transmsson contents can be typed before beng transmtted.

q Perform the steps q to r above.w Type from the connected keyboard to enter the

message that you want to transmt. • The message s shown n the TX buffer screen.e Press [F12] of the connected keyboard to transmt

the message. • The color of dsplayed text, n the TX buffer screen, wll

be changed when transmtted. • To cancel the transmsson, press [F12] twce.r Press [F12] of the keyboard to return to receve.

Main dialEXIT/SET

F-3

[TX]indicator

[RX]indicator Band keys

RTTY/PSK

DECODE

Appears

1500

1195 1805

Vector tuning indicator

FFT scope

TX buffer screen

RX contents screen

Water-fall

• Vector tuning indicator indication exampleTuned BPSK signal

BPSK/QPSK idle signal Unmodulated signal

Tuned QPSK signal

54


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

D About BPSK and QPSK modesBPSK and QPSK modes are avalable for PSK.• BPSK (Bnary Phase Shft Keyng) mode s the most

commonly used mode.• QPSK (Quadrature Phase Shft Keyng) mode has

error correcton capablty to provde better decodng than BPSK mode n margnal condton. However, more accurate tunng s requred wth QPSK mode, due to the tght phase margn of QPSK.

q Durng PSK mode selecton, push [DECODE] (F-3) to dsplay the PSK decode screen.

w Push [<MENU1>] (F-1) to select PSK decode sec-ond menu.

e Push [B/QPSK] (F-2) to toggle between BPSK and QPSK mode alternately.

F-2 F-3F-1

DECODEB/QPSK<MENU1>

• PSK decode screen— BPSK modeAppears

• PSK decode screen— QPSK modeAppears

55


D Functions for the PSK decoder indicationq Push a band key to select the desred band.w Push [RTTY/PSK] to select PSK. • After PSK mode s selected, push and hold [RTTY/

PSK] for 1 sec. to toggle between PSK and PSK-R modes.

• “PSK” or “PSK-R” appears.e Push [DECODE] (F-3) to dsplay the decode

screen. • When tuned nto a PSK sgnal, decoded characters are

dsplayed n the RX contents screen.r Push [HOLD/CLR] (F-2) to freeze the current

screen. • “ ” appears whle the functon s n use. • Push [HOLD/CLR] (F-2) agan to release the functon.t Push and hold [HOLD/CLR] (F-2) for 1 sec. to

clear the dsplayed characters. • “ ” ndcator dsappears at the same tme when

the hold functon s n use.y Push [WIDE] (F-6) to toggle the PSK decode

screen sze from normal and wde. • S/RF meter type durng wde screen ndcaton can be

selected n dsplay set mode. (p. 129)u Push [AFC/NET] (F-5) to turn the AFC functon

ON. • “ ” appears. • If a PSK sgnal s receved wthn the AFC tunng range,

the decoder automatcally tunes nto the sgnal and the offset frequency s dsplayed.

• The AFC tunng range s set to ±15 Hz as the default. Optonal ±8 Hz settng s avalable n PSK decode set mode. (p. 59)

NOTE: The AFC functon may not tune the sgnal properly when a weak PSK sgnal s receved.

i Push [AFC/NET] (F-5) agan to turn the NET func-ton ON.

• “ ” appears addtonally.o Push and hold [AFC/NET] (F-5) for 1 sec. to add

the offset frequency to the dsplayed frequency.!0 Push [EXIT/SET] to close the PSK decode screen.

D Setting the decoder threshold level Adjust the PSK decoder threshold level f some char-acters are dsplayed when no sgnal s receved.

q Call up the PSK decode screen as descrbed above.

w Push [ADJ] (F-4) to select the threshold level set-tng condton.

e Rotate the man dal to adjust the PSK decoder threshold level.


r Push [ADJ] (F-4) to ext from the threshold level settng condton.

EXIT/SET

F-3 F-6F-5 Band keys

F-2 RTTY/PSK

HOLD/CLR

WIDEDECODE AFC/NET

• AFC/NET indications

“AFC” and “NET”indicators

Offset frequency

Main dialF-4 F-5

DEFADJ

Threshold level indication bar

56


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

D PSK memory transmissionPre-set characters can be sent usng the PSK memory. Contents of the memory are set usng the edt menu.

q Durng PSK mode operaton, push [DECODE] (F-3) to select PSK decode screen.

w Push [TX MEM] (F-3) to select PSK memory screen.e Push [1–4/5–8] (F-6) to select memory bank then

push one of the functon keys ([PT1] (F-1) to [PT4] (F-4) or [PT5] (F-1) to [PT8] (F-4)).

• When no keyboard s connected, the selected memory contents wll be transmtted mmedately.

• When a keyboard s connected, the memory contents wll be transmtted mmedately when [F1] to [F8] on the connected keyboard s pressed, or transmtted after [F12] s pressed, dependng on auto transmsson/recepton settng (see below).

• The transmsson date, tme, recepton date and/or tme may be dsplayed n RX contents screen, dependng on settng.

For your information When an external keypad s connected to [MIC] con-

nector on the front panel, the programmed contents, PT1—PT4, can be transmtted. (pgs. 18, 133)

or

F-3 F-6

–F-1 F-4

PT1 PT4–

F-1 F-4

PT5 PT8

/DECODE TX MEM 1–4/5–8

D Automatic transmission/reception settingq Durng PSK mode operaton, push [DECODE] (F-3)

to select PSK decode screen.w Push [TX MEM] (F-3) to select PSK memory

screen, then push [EDIT] (F-5) to select PSK mem-ory edt screen.

• PSK memory contents of Channel 1 (PT1) s selected.e Push [PT1..PT8] (F-6) several tmes to select the

desred PSK memory.r Push [AUTO TX] (F-5) several tmes to select the

desred condton, as follows. • AUTO TX/RX : Automatcal ly transmts the

selected memory and returns to receve after the transmsson.

• AUTO TX : Automatcal ly transmts the selected memory. To return to receve, press [F12] on the key-board.

• AUTO RX : Press [F12] on the keyboard to transmt the selected memory. Automatcally returns to receve after the transmsson.

• No ndcaton : Press [F12] on the keyboard to transmt the selected memory and press [F12] agan to return to receve.

t Push [EXIT/SET] to return to ext from PSK mem-ory edt condton.

NOTE: The transcever always functons n the “AUTO TX/RX” settng when no keyboard s con-nected.

EXIT/SET

F-3 F-6

F-5

/DECODE TX MEM

AUTO TXEDIT /

PT1..PT8

Auto TX/RX settings

57


D Editing PSK memoryThe contents of the PSK memores can be set usng the memory edt menu. The memory can store and re-transmt 8 PSK message for often-used PSK nfor-maton. Total capacty of the memory s 70 characters per memory channel.

• Programming contentsq Durng PSK mode operaton, push [DECODE] (F-3)

to select PSK decode screen.w Push [TX MEM] (F-3) to select PSK memory

screen, then push [EDIT] (F-5) to select PSK mem-ory edt screen.

• PSK memory contents of the Channel 1 (PT1) s selected.

e Push [PT1..PT8] (F-6) several tmes to select the desred PSK memory channel to be edted.

r Push [ABC]/[abc] (MF6) or [123]/[Symbol] (MF7) to select the character group, then rotate the man dal to select the character, or push the keypad for number nput.

• [abc] (MF6) appears when [ABC] (MF6) s pushed when “ABC” character group s selected. and [Symbol] (MF7) appears when [123] (MF7) s pushed when “123” character group s selected.




a to z (small letters)

0 to 9 (numbers)

! # $ % & ¥ ? " ’ ` ^ + – / . , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] ¦ _ _ @ ↵




u Push [EXIT/SET] to set the contents and ext PSK memory edt screen.

For your convenience When a PC keyboard s connected to [USB] con-

nector on the front panel, the PSK memory con-tents can also be edted from the keyboard.

EXIT/SET

F-3 F-6

F-5

/DECODE TX MEM

EDIT

PT1..PT8


Symbol ABC

123

F-3

DEL SPACE

abc

• PSK memory edit screen


CH Contents

PT1 ↵DE Icom Icom K↵PT2 ↵DE Icom Icom Icom K↵PT3 ↵QSL UR 599 599 BK↵PT4 ↵QSL DE Icom Icom UR 599 599 BK↵PT5 ↵73 GL SK↵PT6 ↵CQ CQ CQ DE Icom Icom Icom K↵

PT7↵My transcever s IC–7600 & Antenna s a 3–element trband yag.↵

PT8↵My PSK equpment s nternal modulator & demodulator of the IC–7600.↵

58


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

D PSK decode set modeThs set mode s used to set the PSK AFC range, tme stamp settng, etc.

• Setting contentsq Durng PSK mode operaton, push [DECODE] (F-3)

to select PSK decode screen.w Push [<MENU1>] (F-1) to select the second PSK

decode menu, then push [SET] (F-5) to select PSK decode set mode.

• Push [WIDE] (F-6) to toggle the screen sze from nor-mal and wde.


r Set the desred condton usng the man dal. • Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select a default

condton or value. • Push [Ω ≈] (F-3) to select the set contents for some

tems.t Push [EXIT/SET] to ext from set mode.

F-1 F-2 F-4F-3

DEF

EXIT/SETF-3

F-6

F-1

F-5

Main dialDECODE<MENU1>

SET WIDE

PSK FFT Scope Averaging OFF

Select the FFT scope waveform averagng functon from 2 to 4 and OFF. (default: OFF)

Recommendation!If you use the FFT scope waveform for tunng, usng the default or smaller averagng settng s recom-mended.

PSK FFT Scope Waveform Color 51 153 255

Set the color for the FFT scope waveform.• The color s set n RGB format.• The set color s ndcated n the box besde the RGB

scale.


PSK AFC Range ±15Hz

Select the AFC (Automatc Frequency Control) functon operatng range from ±15 Hz (default) and ±8 Hz.

NOTE: The AFC functon may not tune the sgnal properly when a weak PSK sgnal s receved.

PSK Time Stamp ON

Turn the tme stamp (date, transmsson or recepton tme) dsplay ON and OFF.

• ON : Dsplays the tme stamp.• OFF : No tme stamp dsplay.

PSK Time Stamp (Time) LocalSelects the clock dsplay for tme stamp usage.

NOTE: The tme won’t be dsplayed when “OFF” s selected n “PSK Tme Stamp” as above.

• Local : Selects the tme that set n “Tme (Now).”• UTC* : Selects the tme that set n “CLOCK2.” * The name of choce may dffer accordng to

“CLOCK2 Name” settng (p. 115). “UTC” s the default name of CLOCK2.

59


PSK Time Stamp (Frequency) OFFSelects the operatng frequency dsplay for tme stamp usage.NOTE: The frequency won’t be dsplayed when

“OFF” s selected n “PSK Tme Stamp” as below left.

• ON : Dsplays the operatng frequency.• OFF : No operatng frequency dsplay.

PSK Font Color (Receive) 128 255 128

Set the text color for receved characters.• The color s set n RGB format.• The set color s ndcated n the box besde the RGB

scale.


PSK Font Color (Transmit) 255 106 106

Set the text color for transmtted characters.• The color s set n RGB format.• The set color s ndcated n the box besde the RGB

scale.


PSK Font Color (Time Stamp) 0 155 189Set the text color for tme stamp ndcaton.• The color s set n RGB format.• The set color s ndcated n the box besde the RGB

scale.


PSK Font Color (TX Buffer) 255 255 255

Set the text color n the TX buffer screen.• The color s set n RGB format.• The set color s ndcated n the box besde the RGB

scale.


60


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

D Data savingThe contents of the PSK memory/receved sgnal can be saved nto the USB-Memory.

q Durng PSK decode screen ndcaton, push [<MENU1>] (F-1) to select the PSK decode sec-ond menu.

w Push [SAVE] (F-4) to select decode fle save screen.e Change the followng condtons f desred. • File name: z Push [EDIT] (F-4) to select fle name edt con-




• [ABC] (MF6): A to Z (captal letters); [123] (MF7): 0 to 9 (numerals); [Symbol] (MF7): ! # $ % & ’ ` ^ – ( ) _

_ @ can be selected.

• Push [Ω] (F-1) to move the cursor left, push [≈] (F-2) to move the cursor rght, [DEL] (F-3) delete a character and push [SPACE] (F-4) to nsert a space.

c Push [EXIT/SET] to set the fle name. • File format z Push and hold [SAVE/OPT] (F-5) for 1 sec. to

enter save opton screen. x Rotate the man dal to select the savng for-

mat from Text to HTML. • “Text” s the default settng. • Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select the

default settng. c Push [EXIT/SET] to return to the prevous

ndcaton. • Saving location z Push [DIR/FILE] (F-1) to select tree vew








r Push [SAVE/OPT] (F-5). • After savng s completed, returns to PSK decode sec-

ond menu automatcally.

For your convenience!Two data formats, Text and HTML, are avalable for PC data storage.


F-1 F-2 F-4F-3

DEL SPACE

F-1 F-4 EXIT/SET Main dial

Symbol ABC

123

SAVE EDIT/DIR/FILE<MENU1> /

• Decode file save screen— file name edit

F-4 EXIT/SET Main dialF-5

SAVE/OPTDEF

F-1 F-5

SAVE/OPT

F-4F-2 F-3

DIR/FILE

REN DELMAKE

• Save option screen


61


Repeater operationA repeater retransmts a receved sgnal on a dffer-ent frequency. When usng a repeater, the transmt frequency s shfted from the receve frequency by an offset frequency. A repeater can be accessed usng splt frequency operaton wth the transmt frequency shfted to the repeater's receve frequency.

For accessng a repeater whch requres an access tone, set the tone frequency n tone frequency set mode as descrbed below.

q Set the offset frequences (HF, 50 MHz) and turn ON the quck splt functon n others set mode n advance. (pgs. 89, 129)

w Push [VFO/MEMO] to select VFO mode.e Push the desred band key.r Push [AM/FM] several tmes to select FM mode.t Set the receve frequency (repeater output fre-

quency).y Push and hold [SPLIT] for 1 sec. to start repeater

operaton. • Repeater tone s turned ON automatcally. • [SPLIT] ndcator lghts and “ ” appears on

the LCD. • The tone encoder functon s turned ON n FM mode. • Shfted transmt frequency and “TX” appear n the sub

band. • The transmt frequency can be montored whle push-

ng [XFC].u Push and hold [PTT] to transmt; release [PTT] to

receve.i To return to smplex, push [SPLIT] momentarly.

D Repeater access tone frequency settingSome repeaters requre subaudble tones to be accessed. Subaudble tones are supermposed on your normal sgnal and must be set n advance. The transcever has 50 tones from 67.0 Hz to 254.1 Hz.

q Durng FM mode operaton, push and hold [TONE] (MF7) for 1 sec. to enter tone frequency set mode.

w Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select REPEATER TONE tem.

e Rotate the man dal to select the desred repeater tone frequency.


r Push [EXIT/SET] to return to the prevous ndcaton.

• Available tone frequencies (unt: Hz)

67.069.371.974.477.079.782.5

85.4088.5091.5094.8097.4100.0103.5

107.2110.9114.8118.8123.0127.3131.8

136.5141.3146.2151.4156.7159.8162.2

165.5167.9171.3173.8177.3179.9183.5

186.2189.9192.8196.6199.5203.5206.5

210.7218.1225.7229.1233.6241.8250.3

254.1

Maindial

[SPLIT]indicator Band keys

AM/FM

SPLIT

VFO/MEMOXFC

Appears Appears

F-4 EXIT/SET Main dialF-2F-1

DEF

TONE

• Tone frequency set mode

62


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

Tone squelch operationThe tone squelch opens only when recevng a sg-nal contanng a matchng subaudble tone. You can slently wat for calls from group members usng the same tone.

q Set the desred frequency band and select FM mode.

w Push [TONE] (MF7) several tmes to turn the tone squelch functon ON.

• “ ” appearse Push and hold [TONE] (MF7) for 1 sec. to enter

tone frequency set mode.r Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select T-SQL TONE

tem.t Rotate the man dal to select the desred tone

squelch frequency. • Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select the

default settng.y Push [EXIT/SET] to return to the prevous ndca-

ton.u When the receved sgnal ncludes a matchng

tone, squelch opens and the sgnal can be heard. • When the receved sgnal’s tone does not match,

tone squelch does not open. However, the S-ndcator shows sgnal strength.

• To open the squelch manually, push [XFC].i Operate the transcever n the normal way.o To cancel the tone squelch, push [TONE] (MF7) to

clear “TSQL.”

• Available tone frequencies (unt: Hz)

67.069.371.974.477.079.782.5

085.4088.5091.5094.8097.4100.0103.5

107.2110.9114.8118.8123.0127.3131.8

136.5141.3146.2151.4156.7159.8162.2

165.5167.9171.3173.8177.3179.9183.5

186.2189.9192.8196.6199.5203.5206.5

210.7218.1225.7229.1233.6241.8250.3

254.1

F-4 EXIT/SET Main dialF-2F-1

DEF

TONEXFC

Appears

• Tone frequency set mode

63


Data mode (AFSK) operationWhen operatng AMTOR or PACKET wth your TNC and/or PC software, consult the manual that comes wth the TNC and/or the software.

q Connect a PC and TNC to the transcever. (p. 22)w Push a band key to select the desred band.e Push [SSB] or [AM/FM] to select the desred oper-

atng mode.r Push and hold [SSB] or [AM/FM] that s pushed n

step e for 1 sec. to turn data mode ON. • One of “-D1,” “-D2” or “-D3” s addtonally appears. • Durng data mode selecton, push and hold [SSB] or

[AM/FM] for 1 sec. to select data mode 1 (D1), 2 (D2) and 3 (D3) n sequence.

t Rotate the man dal to tune to the desred sgnal and decode t correctly.

• Also use the tunng ndcator of the TNC or software. • Durng SSB data mode, the 1⁄4 tunng functon can be

used for crtcal tunng.y Operate the PC (software) or TNC to transmt. • When operatng n SSB data mode, adjust the TNC

output level so that the ALC meter readng doesn’t go outsde the ALC zone.

NOTE: When data mode s selected, the audo nput from the [ACC1] (pn 4) s used for transms-son nstead of [MIC]’s dependng on the set mode settngs. Modulaton nput connector can be changed n ACC set mode (p. 124)The fxed condton s used for SSB data transms-son as follows:

• [COMP] : OFF• Tx bandwdth : MID*• Tx Tone (Bass) : 0• Tx Tone (Trebles) : 0

* Fxed to the default value (lower: 300, hgher: 2700). (p. 122)

For your informationCarrer frequency s dsplayed when SSB data mode s selected.See the dagram at rght for the tone-par example.

Main dial

Band keys

AM/FMSSB

Appears

• Tone-pair example

200 Hz 2125 Hz

2325 Hz

Carrier frequency(displayed frequency)

64


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

Spectrum scope screenThs DSP-based spectrum scope allows you to ds-play the frequency and relatve sgnal strength of receved sgnals on the strengths of sgnals. The IC-7600 has two modes for the spectrum dsplay— one s center mode, and the other s fxed mode.In addton, the IC-7600 has a mn scope screen to save screen space.

D Center modeDsplays sgnals around the set frequency wthn the selected span. The set frequency s always dsplayed at the center of the screen.


w Push [SCOPE] (F-1) to select the scope screen.e Push [CENT/FIX] (F-5) several tmes to select the

center mode. • “ ” s dsplayed when center mode s selected.r Push [SPAN] (F-1) several tmes to select the

scope span. • ±2.5, ±5.0, ±10, ±25, ±50, ±100 and ±250 kHz are

avalable. • Push and hold [SPAN] (F-1) for 1 sec. to return to ±2.5

kHz span. • Sweep speed s selectable for each span ndepen-

dently n scope set mode. (pgs. 68, 69)t Push [ATT] (F-2) several tmes to actvate an

attenuator or turn the attenuator OFF. • 10, 20 and 30 dB attenuators are avalable. • Push and hold [ATT] (F-2) for 1 sec. to turn OFF the

attenuator.y Push [MARKER] (F-3) several tmes to turn the

marker for transmt frequency and/or sub readout frequency ON or OFF.

• “ ” dsplays the marker at the transmt frequency. • “ ” dsplays the marker at the sub readout frequency. • “<<” or “>>” appears when the marker s out of range. • The spectrum scope shows the transmt sgnal whle

transmttng. Ths can be deactvated n scope set mode. (p. 68)

• The spectrum scope shows the peak level hold func-ton. Peak levels are dsplayed n the background of the current spectrum n a dfferent color. Ths can be deac-tvated and the waveform color can be set n scope set mode. (p. 68)

u Push [HOLD] (F-4) to freeze the current spectrum dsplay.

• “ ” appears whle the functon s n use. • Push and hold [HOLD] (F-4) to clear the current spec-

trum waveform.i Push [EXIT/SET] to ext the scope screen.

NOTE: If a strong sgnal s receved, a ghost sgnal may also appear. Push [ATT] (F-2) several tmes to actvate the spectrum scope attenuator n ths case.

F-1 F-2 F-3

F-5F-4

EXIT/SET

/SCOPE SPAN ATT MARKER

HOLD CENT/FIX

• Scope spurious signal example

Spurous sgnals may be receved on the spectrum scope screen regardless of the transcever’s state (TX or RX). They are generated n the scope crcut. Ths does not ndcate a transcever malfuncton.

Scope spurious example

65


Appears

D Fixed modeDsplays sgnals wthn the specfed frequency range. Condtons on the selected frequency band can be observed at a glance when usng ths mode.


w Push [SCOPE] (F-1) to select the scope screen.e Push [CENT/FIX] (F-5) several tmes to select the

fxed mode. • “ ” s dsplayed when fxed mode s selected.r Push [ATT] (F-2) several tmes to actvate an

attenuator or turn the attenuator OFF. • 10, 20 and 30 dB attenuators are avalable. • Push and hold [ATT] (F-2) for 1 sec. to turn OFF the

attenuator.t Push [MARKER] (F-3) several tmes to turn the

marker for transmt frequency and/or sub readout frequency ON or OFF.

• “ ” dsplays the marker at the transmt frequency. • “ ” dsplays the marker at the sub readout frequency. • “ ” dsplays the marker at the man readout fre-

quency. (always dsplayed) • “<<” or “>>” appears when the marker s out of range. • The spectrum scope shows the transmt sgnal whle

transmttng. Ths can be deactvated n scope set mode. (p. 68)

• The spectrum scope shows the peak level hold func-ton. Peak levels are dsplayed n the background of the current spectrum n a dfferent color. Ths can be deac-tvated and the waveform color can be set n scope set mode. (p. 68)

y Push [HOLD] (F-4) to freeze the current spectrum waveform.

• “ ” appears whle the functon s n use. • Push and hold [HOLD] (F-4) to clear the current spec-

trum waveform.u Push [EXIT/SET] to ext the scope screen.

NOTE: If a strong sgnal s receved, a ghost sgnal may appear. Push [ATT] (F-2) several tmes to actvate the spectrum scope attenuator n ths case.

The scope bandwdth can be specfed for each fre-quency band ndependently n scope set mode. (pgs. 69 to 71)

F-1 F-2 F-3

F-5F-4

EXIT/SET

/SCOPE SPAN ATT MARKER

HOLD CENT/FIX

66


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

Appears

D Mini scope screen indicationThe mn scope screen can be dsplayed wth another screen dsplay, such as set mode menu, decode screen, memory lst screen, etc. smultaneously.

q Set the scope mode (center or fxed), marker, attenuator, span, etc. n advance. (pgs. 65, 66)

w Push and hold [MAIN/SUB M.SCOPE] for 1 sec. to select the mn scope ndcaton.

• The S/RF meter type durng mn scope ndcaton can be selected n dsplay set mode (Meter Type (Wde Screen) tem). (p. 126)

D Scope set modeThs set mode s used to set the waveform color, sweepng speed, scope range for fxed mode, etc.

q Durng spectrum scope dsplay ON, push [SET] (F-6) to select scope set mode screen.

• Push [WIDE] (F-6) to toggle the screen sze between normal and wde.

w Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desred set tem.

e Set the desred condton usng the man dal. • Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select the

default condton or value. • Push [Ω ≈] (F-3) to select the set contents for some

tems.r Push [EXIT/SET] to ext from set mode.

MAIN/SUB

M.SCOPEM.SCOPE

F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4

F-6

EXIT/SET Main dial

SET

DEF

67


Scope during Tx (CENTER Type) ON

Turn dsplay of the transmt sgnal ON and OFF. NOTE: Transmt sgnal dsplay s avalable for the center mode only.

Max Hold ONTurn the peak level hold functon ON and OFF.

CENTER Type Display Filter Center

Select the center frequency of the spectrum scope ndcaton (center mode only).

• Flter Center : Shows the selected flter’s center frequency at the center.

• Carrer Pont Center : Shows the selected operatng mode

carrer pont frequency at the center.• Carrer Pont Center (Abs. Freq.) : In addton to the carrer pont center

settng above, the actual frequency s dsplayed for the bottom of the scope.

Waveform Color (Current) 217 241 247

Set the waveform color for the currently receved sgnals.

• The color s set n RGB format.• Push [Ω ≈] (F-3) to select R (Red), G (Green) and

B (Blue), and rotate the rato from 0 to 255 range. • The set color s ndcated n the box besde the

RGB scale.

Waveform Color (Max Hold) 58 110 147

Set the waveform color for the receved sgnals max-mum level.

• The color s set n RGB format.• Push [Ω ≈] (F-3) to select R (Red), G (Green) and

B (Blue), and rotate the rato from 0 to 255 range. • The set color s ndcated n the box besde the

RGB scale.

Sweep Speed (± 2.5k) MID

Select the sweep speed for the ±2.5 kHz span selec-ton from SLOW, MID and FAST.

NOTE: Sgnals may be dsplayed ncorrectly wth “FAST” settng.

Sweep Speed (± 5k) MID

Select the sweep speed for the ±5 kHz span selec-ton from SLOW, MID and FAST.

NOTE: Sgnals may be dsplayed ncorrectly wth “FAST” settng.

Sweep Speed (± 10k) FAST



68


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

D Scope set mode (contnued)





Sweep Speed (±100k) FAST

Select the sweep speed for the ±100 kHz span selecton from SLOW, MID and FAST.

Sweep Speed (±250k) FAST

Select the sweep speed for the ±250 kHz span selecton from SLOW, MID and FAST.

Fixed Edges ( 0.03 − 1.60) 0.750 − 1.250 MHzSet the scope edge frequences for fixed mode for bands below 1.6 MHz.

• Set the frequences wthn 0.030 to 1.600 MHz range n 1 kHz steps.

As edge frequences are set, the other edge fre-quency wll be automatcally set for a dsplay band wdth of 5 kHz to a maxmum of 500 kHz.

Fixed Edges ( 1.60 − 2.00) 1.800 − 2.000 MHzSet the scope edge frequences for fxed mode scope when the 1.6 to 2 MHz band s selected.


Fixed Edges ( 2.00 − 6.00) 3.500 − 4.000 MHz

Set the scope edge frequences for fxed mode scope when the 2 to 6 MHz band s selected.



Fixed Edges ( 6.00 − 8.00) 7.000 − 7.300 MHz




69


Fixed Edges ( 8.00 − 11.00) 10.100 − 10.150 MHz




Fixed Edges (11.00 − 15.00) 14.000 − 14.350 MHzSet the scope edge frequences for fxed mode scope when the 11 to 15 MHz band s selected.



Fixed Edges (15.00 − 20.00) 18.068 − 18.168 MHz




Fixed Edges (20.00 − 22.00) 21.000 − 21.450 MHz




Fixed Edges (22.00 − 26.00) 24.890 − 24.990 MHz





70


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

D Scope set mode (contnued)




Fixed Edges (30.00 − 45.00) 30.000 − 30.500 MHz







71


PreamplifierThe preamp amplfes receved sgnals n the recever front end, to mprove the S/N rato and senstvty.Set ths to preamp 1 or preamp 2 when recevng weak sgnals.

Push [P.AMP] (MF3) several tmes to set the pre-amp OFF, preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON.

Push and hold [P.AMP] (MF3) for 1 sec. to turn the preamp functon OFF.

For all HF and 50 MHz bands

Hgh-gan preamp for 24 MHz band and above (Avalable for all HF and 50 MHz bands)

About the “P.AMP2”The “P.AMP 2” s a hgh gan receve amplfer. When the “P.AMP 2” s used n the presence of strong elec-tromagnetc felds, dstorton sometmes results. In such cases, use the transcever wth the “P.AMP 1” or “P.AMP OFF” settng.

The “P.AMP 2” s most effectve when:• Used on bands above 24 MHz and when sgnals are

weak.• Receve senstvty s nsuffcent when usng low-

gan antennas, or whle usng a narrow band antenna (such as small loop, a Beverage antenna or a short Yag antenna).

AttenuatorThe attenuator prevents a desred sgnal from dstor-ton when very strong sgnals are near the desred frequency or when very strong electromagnetc felds, such as from broadcast statons near your locaton.

Push [ATT] (MF4) several tmes to set the attenua-tor 6 dB, 12 dB, 18 dB or attenuator OFF.

Push and hold [ATT] (MF4) for 1 sec. to turn the attenuator functon OFF.

6 dB attenuaton

12 dB attenuaton

18 dB attenuaton

P.AMP

ATT

72


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

RIT functionThe RIT (Receve Increment Tunng) functon com-pensates for off-frequency operaton of the receved staton.

The functon shfts the receve frequency up to ±9.999 kHz n 1 Hz steps (10 Hz steps when cancellng the 1 Hz step readout) wthout movng the transmt fre-quency.

q Push [RIT] to turn the RIT functon ON and OFF. • “ ” and the shftng frequency appear when the

functon s ON.w Rotate the [RIT/∂TX] control. • Push and hold [CLEAR] for 1 sec. to reset the RIT fre-

quency. • Push [CLEAR] momentarly to reset the RIT frequency

when the quck RIT/∂TX clear functon s ON. (p. 132) • Push and hold [RIT] for 1 sec. to add the shft fre-

quency to the operatng frequency.

D RIT monitor functionWhen the RIT functon s ON, pushng and holdng [XFC] allows you to montor the operatng frequency drectly (RIT s temporarly cancelled).

For your convenience— Calculate functionThe shft frequency of the RIT functon can be added/subtracted to the dsplayed frequency.

Whle dsplayng the RIT shft frequency, push and hold [RIT] for 1 sec.

[RIT/∂TX]

CLEARRIT

XFC

RIT shftng frequency

73


AGC functionThe AGC (auto gan control) controls recever gan to produce a constant audo output level even when the receved sgnal strength vares greatly.The transcever has 3 preset AGC characterstcs (tme constant: fast, md, slow) for non-FM mode.

The FM mode AGC tme constant s fxed as ‘FAST’ (0.1 sec.) and AGC tme constant cannot be changed.

D Selecting the preset valueq Select any non-FM mode.w Push [AGC] (MF5) several tmes to select AGC

fast, AGC medum (MID) or AGC slow.

F-4 EXIT/SET Main dialDEF

[AGC]

D Setting the AGC time constant preset valueq Select any non-FM mode.w Push and hold [AGC] (MF5) for 1 sec. to enter

AGC set mode.e Push [AGC] (MF5) several tmes to select FAST

tme constant.r Rotate the man dal to set the desred tme con-

stant for ‘AGC FAST.’ • AGC tme constant can be set between 0.1 to 8.0 sec.

(depends on mode) or turned OFF. • Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select a default

value.t Push [AGC] (MF5) to select medum tme con-

stant.y Rotate the man dal to set the desred tme con-

stant for ‘AGC MID.’ • AGC tme constant can be set between 0.1 to 8.0 sec.


value.u Push [AGC] (MF5) to select slow tme constant.i Rotate the man dal to set the desred tme con-

stant for ‘AGC SLOW.’ • AGC tme constant can be set between 0.1 to 8.0 sec.


value.o Select another non-FM mode, then repeat steps e

to i f desred.!0 Push [EXIT/SET] to ext the AGC set mode screen.

• AGC set mode screen

• Selectable AGC time constant (unt: sec.)

Mode Default Selectable AGC time constant

SSB

0.3 (FAST)OFF, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0

2.0 (MID)

6.0 (SLOW)

CW

0.1 (FAST)OFF, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0

0.5 (MID)

1.2 (SLOW)

RTTYPSK

0.1 (FAST)OFF, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0

0.5 (MID)

1.2 (SLOW)

AM

3.0 (FAST)OFF, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0, 7.0, 8.0

5.0 (MID)

7.0 (SLOW)

FM 0.1 (FAST) Fxed

74


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

Twin PBT operation<MODE> SSB/CW/RTTY/PSK/AMPBT (Passband Tunng) electroncally narrows the IF passband wdth by shftng the IF frequency slghtly outsde of the IF flter passband to reject nterference. The IC-7600 uses DSP for the PBT functon. Movng both [TWIN-PBT] controls to the same poston shfts the IF both above and below the receved frequency.

The LCD shows the passband wdth and shft fre-quency graphcally.

• The ndcator on the [PBT-CLR] swtch lghts when PBT s n use.

Push and hold [FILTER] for 1 sec. to enter the flter set screen. Current passband wdth and shft fre-quency s dsplayed n the flter set screen.

To set the [TWIN-PBT] controls to the center pos-tons, push and hold [PBT-CLR] for 1 sec.

The varable range depends on the passband wdth and mode. The edge of the varable range s half of the passband wdth, and PBT s adjustable n 25 (SSB/CW/RTTY/PSK modes) or 100 Hz (AM mode) steps.

• The [TWIN-PBT] controls should normally be set to the center postons (PBT settng s cleared) when there s no nterference.

• When PBT s used, the audo tone may be changed.• Not avalable for FM mode.• Whle rotatng the [TWIN-PBT] controls, nose may

occur. Ths comes from the DSP unt and does not ndcate an equpment malfuncton.

• Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select a default value.

• PBT operation example

PBT2

PBT1

PBT2

PBT1

PBT2

PBT1

IF center frequency Interference Desired signal

Passband

Both controls at center position

Cutting the lower passband edge

Cutting both lower and higher passband edges

Interference InterferenceDesired signal

Passband

[TWIN-PBT]PBT-CLR

FILTERF-4

DEF

Shows filter width, shifting value and condition

• Filter set screen“SHARP” is selected.

75


IF filter selectionThe transcever has 3 passband wdth IF flters for each mode.

For SSB, CW and PSK modes, the passband wdth can be set wthn 50 to 3600 Hz n 50 or 100 Hz steps. A total of 41 passband wdths are avalable.

For RTTY mode, the passband wdth can be set wthn 50 to 2700 Hz n 50 or 100 Hz steps. A total of 32 passband wdths are avalable.

For AM mode, the passband wdth can be set wthn 200 Hz to 10 kHz n 200 Hz steps. A total of 50 pass-band wdths are avalable.

For FM mode, the passband wdth s fxed and 3 passband wdths are avalable.

The flter selecton s automatcally memorzed n each mode.The PBT shft frequences are automatcally mem-orzed n each flter.

D IF filter selectionq Select the desred mode.w Push [FILTER] several tmes to select the IF flter

1, 2 or 3. • The selected passband wdth and flter number s ds-

played n the LCD.

D Filter passband width setting (except FM mode)

q Push and hold [FILTER] for 1 sec. to enter flter set screen.

w Select any mode except FM. • Passband wdths for FM modes are fxed and cannot

be set.e Push [FILTER] several tmes to select the desred

IF flter.r Push [BW] (F-1), then rotate the man dal to adjust

the desred passband wdth. Then push [BW] (F-1) to set.

• Whle pushng and holdng [BW] (F-1), rotatng the man dal also adjusts the passband wdth. After adjust-ment, release [BW] (F-1) to set.

• In SSB, CW and PSK modes, the passband wdth can be set wthn the followng range.

50 to 500 Hz 50 Hz steps 600 to 3600 Hz 100 Hz steps • In RTTY mode, the passband wdth can be set wthn

the followng range. 50 to 500 Hz 50 Hz steps 600 to 2700 Hz 100 Hz steps • In AM mode, the passband wdth can be set wthn the

followng range. 200 Hz to 10 kHz 200 Hz steps • Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select a default

value. (Roofng flter settng also selects a default value.)t Repeat steps w to r f desred for other modes.y Push [EXIT/SET] to ext flter set screen.

FILTERF-1

BW

F-4

DEF

EXIT/SET Main dial

SelectedIF filter

Passbandwidth

• Durng the passband wdth settng

The PBT shft frequences are cleared when the passband wdth s changed.

Ths flter set screen graphcally dsplays the PBT shft frequences and CW ptch operatons.

76


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

Blnks

D Roofing filter selectionThe IC-7600 has 3, 6 and 15 kHz roofng flters at the 1st IF frequency. The roofng flter provdes nterfer-ence reducton from nearby strong sgnals.


w Select any mode except FM.e Push [ROOFING] (F-5] to select the desred flter

wdth from 15 kHz, 6 kHz and 3 kHz. • Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select a default

value. (Flter passband wdth settng also selects a default value.)

r Push [EXIT/SET] to ext flter set screen.

D DSP filter shapeThe type of DSP flter shape for each SSB, SSB data and CW can be selected ndependently from soft and sharp.


w Select SSB, SSB data or CW mode.e Push [SHAPE] (F-6) several tmes to select the

desred flter shape from soft and sharp.r Push [EXIT/SET] to ext flter set screen.

The flter shape can be set for each band (HF and 50 MHz bands), mode, as well as the passband wdth settng (CW only) ndependently from your default settng n flter shape set mode.

F-5F-4

DEF ROOFING

EXIT/SETFILTER

• Filter set screen“SHARP” is selected.

• Default roofing filter (unt: kHz)

Mode FIL1 FIL2 FIL3 Mode FIL1 FIL2 FIL3

SSB 15 15 6 RTTY 15 6 6

SSB-D 6 6 6 PSK 6 6 6

CW 6 6 6 AM 15 15 15

F-1 F-2

F-6F-4

DEF SHAPE

EXIT/SET Main dialFILTER

77


HF SSB (600Hz – ) SHARP

Select the flter shape for SSB mode n HF bands. The set filter shape s automatcally used only when the IF filter s set to 600 Hz or wder.

SSB-D (600Hz – ) SHARP

Select the flter shape for SSB data mode n HF bands.

The set filter shape s automatcally used only when the IF filter s set to 600 Hz or wder.

CW ( – 500Hz) SHARP

Select the flter shape for CW mode n HF bands. The set filter shape s automatcally used only when the IF filter s set to 500 Hz or narrower.

CW (600Hz – ) SHARP

Select the flter shape for CW mode n HF bands. The set filter shape s automatcally used only when the IF filter s set to 600 Hz or wder.

50M SSB (600Hz – ) SOFT

Select the flter shape for SSB mode n 50 MHz band.


SSB-D (600Hz – ) SHARP

Select the flter shape for SSB data mode n 50 MHz band.


CW ( – 500Hz) SHARP

Select the flter shape for CW mode n 50 MHz band.

The set filter shape s automatcally used only when the IF filter s set to 500 Hz or narrower.

CW (600Hz – ) SHARP

Select the flter shape for CW mode n 50 MHz band.


78


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

D Filter shape set modeThe type of DSP flter shape for SSB, SSB data and CW can be selected ndependently from soft and sharp.


w Push and hold [SHAPE] (F-6) for 1 sec. to enter fl-ter shape set mode.

w Select the desred tem usng [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2).e Rotate the man dal to select the flter shape from

soft and sharp. • Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select a default

value.t Push [EXIT/SET] to ext flter shape set mode.

• Filter shape set mode

Dualwatch operationDualwatch montors 2 frequences wth the same mode smultaneously.Durng dualwatch, both frequences should be on the same band, because the bandpass flter n the RF cr-cut s selected for the man readout frequency.

q Set a desred frequency nto the man band.w Push and hold [DUALWATCH] for 1 sec. • “ ” appears. • The sub readout operatng mode s equalzed to the

man readout. • Equalzed receve frequency appears on the sub band

frequency readout. Ths quck dualwatch functon can be turned OFF n others set mode. (p. 128)

• Pushng [DUALWATCH] momentarly actvates the dualwatch wth the prevously operated frequency.

e Rotate the man dal to set another desred fre-quency.

r Push [MAIN/SUB M.SCOPE] to enables the sub band access when changng the frequency, etc. n sub band.

• Push [MAIN/SUB M.SCOPE] agan for the man band access.

t Adjust the [BAL] control to set a sutable sgnal strength balance between the man and sub read-out frequences.

• S-meter shows the combned sgnal strength.y To transmt on the sub readout frequency, push

[CHANGE] or [SPLIT].

NOTE:• A beat note may be heard dependng on the fre-

quency combnaton.• The RIT functon can be used for the man read-

out only.• The ∂TX functon can be used for the transmt

readout (man readout when the splt functon OFF; sub readout when the splt functon ON).

[BAL] control

DUALWATCH SPLIT CHANGE

MAIN/SUB

M.SCOPEM.SCOPE

Main dial

Appears

79


• Scanning during dualwatchScannng operates only for the man readout. To operate the scan durng dualwatch, scan on the man readout and use the sub readout for your QSO usng both dualwatch and splt frequency operaton.

q Program the desred programmed scan edges n the same amateur band. See p. 101 for program-mng.

• If you plan to operate a ∂F scan, programmng the scan edges may not be necessary.

w Push [SPLIT] to turn the splt frequency functon ON.

• “ ” appears.e Select VFO mode for the man readout.r Set the desred operatng frequency for the man

readout.t Push and hold [DUALWATCH] for 1 sec. • “ ” appears. • Equalzed receve frequency and operatng mode

appear on the sub band readout and the dualwatch functon s turned ON.

y Push [SCAN] (F-5) to select the scan screen. • Push [EXIT/SET] several tmes to close a mult-func-

ton screen, f necessary.u Push [PROG] (F-1) or [∂F] (F-2) to start the pro-

grammed scan or ∂F scan, respectvely. • Scan actvates on the man readout between the pro-

grammed scan edges or wthn the ∂F span. • Transmttng on the sub readout stops the scan.i To cancel the scan, push [EXIT/SET].

F-1 F-2 F-5 EXIT/SET

DUALWATCH SPLIT

PROG SCAN∂F

80


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

Noise blanker<MODE> SSB/CW/RTTY/PSK/AMThe nose blanker elmnates pulse-type nose such as the nose from car gntons. The nose blanker s not avalable for FM mode.

Push [NB] to turn the nose blanker functon ON and OFF.

• The ndcator on ths swtch lghts green when the nose blanker s ON.

When usng the nose blanker, receved sgnals may be dstorted f they are excessvely strong or for other types of nose than mpulse. Turn the nose blanker OFF, or set the nose blanker thresh-old level (see below) to a shallow poston n ths case.

D NB set modeTo deal wth varous type of nose, attenuaton level and nose blankng duraton can be set n NB set mode.

q Push and hold [NB] for 1 sec. to enter NB set mode.

w Select the desred tem usng [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2).e Rotate the man dal to the desred set value or

condton. • Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select a default

value.r Push [EXIT/SET] to ext NB set mode.

F-1 F-2 F-4

DEF

EXIT/SET Main dialNB

• NB set mode

NB Level 50%

Set the nose blanker threshold level from 0% to 100%.

NB Depth 8

Set the nose attenuaton level from 1 to 10.

NB Width 50

Set the blankng duraton from 1 to 100.

81


Noise reductionThe nose reducton functon reduces random nose components and enhances desred sgnals whch are bured n nose. The DSP performs the random nose reducton functon.

q Push [NR] to turn the nose reducton ON. • The ndcator on ths swtch lghts green.w Rotate the [NR] control to adjust the nose reduc-

ton level.e Push [NR] to turn the nose reducton OFF. • The ndcator goes off.

Large rotatons of the [NR] control results n audo sgnal maskng or dstorton. Set the [NR] control for maxmum readablty.

Dial lock function The dal lock functon prevents frequency changes by accdental movement of the tunng dal. The lock functon electroncally locks the dal.

Push and hold [SPEECH/LOCK] for 1 sec. to tog-gle the dal lock functon ON and OFF.

• The [LOCK] ndcator lghts when the dal lock functon s n use.

• Whle splt frequency operaton s ON, the splt lock functon may be turned ON. (p. 89)

NOTE: When “LOCK/SPEECH” s selected n [[SPEECH/LOCK] Swtch] tem n others set mode, pushng [SPEECH/LOCK] actvates the dal lock functon. (p. 131)

[NR]control

NR

Noise reduction OFF Noise reduction activated

Desired signal (CW)

Noise components

[LOCK] indicator

SPEECHLOCK

82


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

Notch functionThs transcever has auto and manual notch func-tons.The auto notch functon uses DSP to automatcally attenuate beat tones, tunng sgnals, etc., even f they are movng. The manual notch can be set to attenu-ate a frequency va the [NOTCH] control.The auto notch can be used n SSB, AM and FM mode.The manual notch can be used n SSB, CW, RTTY, PSK and AM modes.

Push [NOTCH] to toggle the notch functon between auto, manual and OFF n SSB and AM modes.

• Ether auto or manual notch functon can be deact-vated n others set mode. (p. 132)

Push [NOTCH] to turn the manual notch functon ON and OFF n CW, RTTY, PSK modes.

Push [NOTCH] to turn the auto notch functon ON and OFF n FM mode.

• The ndcator on ths swtch lghts green when the auto or manual notch functon s ON.

• When the manual notch functon s ON, push and hold [NOTCH] for 1 sec. to select the notch flter wdth for manual notch from wde, mddle and narrow.

• Set to attenuate a frequency for manual notch va the [NOTCH] control.

• “ ” appears when auto notch s n use. • “ ” appears when manual notch s n use.

Whle tunng the manual notch, nose may be heard. Ths comes from the DSP unt and does not ndcate an equpment malfuncton.

Auto tune function<MODE> CW/AMThe automatc tunng functon tunes the dsplayed fre-quency automatcally when an off-frequency sgnal s receved wthn the range ±500 Hz (CW) or ±5 kHz (AM). Ths functon s actve whle n CW or AM mode s selected.

Push [AUTO TUNE] to toggle the auto tune func-ton ON or OFF.

• “ ” blnks when auto tune functon s act-vated.

• After 2 sec. has passed, the auto tune functon stops tunng automatcally even t’s stll off-frequency.

IMPORTANT!When recevng a weak sgnal, or recevng a sg-nal wth nterference, the automatc tunng functon may tune the recever to an undesred sgnal.

NOTE: The automatc tunng functon does not actve on the sub band.

[NOTCH]control

NOTCH

• Auto notch indicationAppears

• Manual notch indicationAppears

Unwanted tone frequency

Desired signal (AF)

Desired signal (AF)

Particular frequency is attenuated

Auto notch OFF Auto notch ON

AUTOTUNE

Appears

83


VOX function<MODE> SSB/AM/FMThe VOX (Voce-Operated Transmsson) functon swtches between transmt and receve wth your voce. Ths functon provdes “hands-free” operaton.

D Using the VOX functionq Select a phone mode (SSB, AM, FM).w Push [VOX] (MF6) to turn the VOX functon ON or

OFF. • “VOX” appears whle the VOX s n use.

D Adjusting the VOX functionq Push [SSB] or [AM/FM] to select a phone mode

(SSB, AM, FM).w Push and hold [VOX] (MF6) for 1 sec. to enter

VOX set mode.e Select the VOX gan tem usng [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2).r Whle speakng nto the mcrophone, rotate the

man dal to the pont where the transcever s con-tnuously transmttng.

t If the receve audo from the speaker causes the VOX crcut to swtch to, adjust the ant-VOX set-tng to the pont where speaker audo does not act-vate the VOX.

• Select the Ant-VOX tem usng [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2). • Rotate the man dal.y Adjust the VOX delay for a convenent nterval

before returnng to receve.u Set the VOX voce delay f desred.i Push [EXIT/SET] to ext VOX set mode.

F-1 F-2 F-4

DEF

EXIT/SET Main dial

VOX

SSB AM/FM

• VOX set mode screen

VOX Gain 50%Ths tem adjusts the VOX gan for the VOX func-ton. Hgher values make the VOX functon more senstve to your voce.

Ths settng can be adjusted from 0% to 100% n 1%steps.

Anti–VOX 50%Ths tem adjusts the ANTI-VOX gan for the VOX functon. Hgher values make the VOX functon less senstve to recever output audo from a speaker or headphones.

Ths settng can be adjusted from 0% to 100% n 1%steps.

VOX Delay 0.2s

Set the VOX delay for a convenent nterval before returnng to receve wthn 0.0 to 2.0 sec. range.

VOX Voice Delay OFFSet the VOX voce delay to prevent clppng of the frst few syllables of a transmsson when swtchng to transmt.OFF, Short, Md and Long settngs are avalable.

When usng the VOX voce delay, turn the TX montor functon OFF to prevent transmtted audo from be echoed.

84


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

Push and hold for 1 sec. to select a default value.

Break-in function<MODE> CWThe break-n functon s used n CW mode to auto-matcally toggle the transcever between transmt and receve when keyng. The IC-7600 s capable of full break-n or sem break-n.

D Semi break-in operationDurng sem break-n operaton, the transcever mme-dately transmts when keyng, then returns to receve after a pre-set delay tme has passed from when you stop keyng.

q Push [CW] to select CW or CW-R mode.w Push [BK-IN] (MF6) once or twce to turn the sem

break-n functon ON. • “BKIN” appears.e Rotate [BK-IN DELAY] to set the break-n delay

tme (the delay from transmt to receve).

When usng a paddle, rotate [KEY SPEED] to adjust the keyng speed.

D Full break-in operationDurng full break-n operaton, the transcever mme-dately transmts when keyng, then returns to receve after you stop keyng.

q Push [CW] to select CW or CW-R mode.w Push [BK-IN] (MF6) once or twce to turn the full

break-n functon ON. • “F-BKIN” appears.

When usng a paddle, rotate [KEY SPEED] to adjust the keyng speed.

[BK-IN DELAY] [KEY SPEED]

CWBK-IN

[KEY SPEED]

BK-IN CW

Appears

Appears

85


Speech compressor<MODE> SSBThe speech compressor ncreases average RF output power, mprovng sgnal strength and readablty.

q Push [SSB] to select USB or LSB mode.w Push and hold [COMP] (MF7) for 1 sec. to select

COMP TBW set screen.e Adjust the [MIC GAIN] control so that the ALC

meter reads wthn the ALC zone, whether or not you speak softly or loudly.

r Push [COMP] (MF7) to turn the speech compres-sor ON.

t Whle speakng nto the mcrophone, rotate the man dal, so that the COMP meter reads wthn the COMP zone (10 to 20 dB range) for your normal voce level.

When the COMP meter peaks exceed 20 dB, your transmtted voce may be dstorted.

y Push [COMP] (MF7) or [EXIT/SET] to ext COMP TBW set screen.

u Adjust the drve gan to set the ALC meter read-ng wthn the 30 to 50% range of the ALC scale. (p. 37)

Transmit filter width setting<MODE> SSBThe transmt flter wdth for SSB mode can be selected from wde, mddle and narrow.

q Push [SSB] to select USB or LSB mode.w Push and hold [COMP] (MF7) for 1 sec. to select

COMP TBW set screen.e Push [COMP] (MF7) to turn the speech compres-

sor ON or OFF.r Push [TBW] (F-3) several tmes to select the

desred transmt flter wdth from wde, mddle and narrow.

• The flter can be ndependently set on the speech com-pressor functon s ON and OFF.

• The followng flters are specfed as the default. Each of the flter wdth can be re-set n level set mode. (p. 122)

WIDE : 100 Hz to 2.9 kHz MID : 300 Hz to 2.7 kHz NAR : 500 Hz to 2.5 kHz

t Push [COMP] (MF7) or [EXIT/SET] to ext COMP TBW set screen.

[MIC GAIN] EXIT/SET Main dial

COMP

SSB

• COMP/TBW set screen

EXIT/SETF-3

TBW

COMP

SSB

Speech compressor s ON

Speech compressor s OFF

“WIDE” settng

86


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

∂TX functionThe ∂TX functon shfts the transmt frequency up to ±9.999 kHz n 1 Hz steps (10 Hz steps when cancel-lng the 1 Hz step readout) wthout movng the receve frequency.

q Push [∂TX] to turn ∂TX functon ON. • “ ” and the shftng frequency appear when the

functon s ON.w Rotate the [RIT/∂TX] control.e To reset the ∂TX frequency, push and hold

[CLEAR] for 1 sec. • Push [CLEAR] momentarly to reset the ∂TX fre-

quency when the quck RIT/∂TX clear functon s ON. (p. 132)

r To cancel the ∂TX functon, push [∂TX] agan. • “ ” and the shftng frequency dsappears.

When RIT and ∂TX are ON at the same tme, the [RIT/∂TX] control shfts both the transmt and receve frequences from the dsplayed frequency at the same tme.

D ∂TX monitor functionWhen the ∂TX functon s ON, pushng and holdng [XFC] allows you to montor the operatng frequency drectly.

For your convenience— Calculate functionThe shft frequency of the ∂TX functon can be added/subtracted to the dsplayed frequency.

Whle dsplayng the ∂TX shft frequency, push and hold [∂TX] for 1 sec.

Monitor functionThe montor functon allows you to montor your trans-mt IF sgnals n any mode. Use ths to check voce characterstcs whle adjustng SSB transmt parame-ter (p. 121).The CW sdetone functons regardless of the [MONITOR] swtch settng.

q Push [MONITOR] to turn the montor functon ON and OFF.

• The ndcator on ths swtch lghts green when the mon-tor functon s ON.

w Push and hold [MONITOR] to montor set mode.e Rotate the man dal to adjust the montor level. • Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select a default

value.r Push [EXIT/SET] to ext montor set mode.

NOTE: When usng the VOX voce delay, turn the montor functon OFF; or transmtted audo wll be echoed.

[RIT/∂TX]

∂TX CLEAR

XFC

EXIT/SET Main dialF-4

DEF

MONITOR

• Monitor set mode

Appears

87


Split frequency operationSplt frequency operaton allows you to transmt and receve n the same mode on two dfferent frequen-ces. Splt frequency operaton s performed usng 2 frequences on the man and sub readouts.

The followng s an example of settng 21.290 MHz for recevng and 21.310 MHz for transmttng.

q Set 21.290 MHz (USB) n VFO mode.w Push [SPLIT], then push and hold [CHANGE] for 1

sec. • The quck splt functon s much more convenent for

selectng the transmt frequency. See the next secton for detals.

• The equalzed transmt frequency and “ ” appear on the LCD.

• [SPLIT] ndcator lghts. • “ ” appears to show the transmt frequency read-

out.e Whle pushng and holdng [XFC], rotate the man

dal to set the transmt frequency to 21.310 MHz. • The transmt frequency can be montored whle push-

ng [XFC].r Now you can receve on 21.290 MHz and transmt

on 21.310 MHz.

To change the transmt and receve frequences, push [CHANGE] to exchange the man and sub readouts.

CONVENIENT• Direct shift frequency inputThe shft frequency can be entered drectly.q Push [F-INP ENT].w Enter the desred shft frequency wth the dgt keys. • 1 kHz to 9.999 MHz can be set. • When you requre a negatve shft drecton, push

[GENE •] n advance.e Push [SPLIT] to nput the shft frequency n the sub

readout and the splt functon s turned ON.

• Dualwatch functionThe dualwatch functon s convenent for tunng the transmt frequency whle montorng both frequences used for transmttng and recevng.

• Split lock function (p. 129)Accdentally releasng [XFC] whle rotatng the man dal changes the receve frequency. To prevent ths, use both the splt lock and dal lock functons to change the transmt frequency only. The splt lock functon cancels the dal lock functon whle pushng [XFC] durng splt frequency operaton.

The splt lock functon s OFF by default, but can be turned ON n others set mode.

Main dial

[SPLIT] indicator SPLIT

MAIN/SUB

M.SCOPEM.SCOPE

XFCCHANGE

• When the split function ON

• When [XFC] is pushed

• The split frequency operation is ready

88


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

Quick split functionWhen you fnd a DX staton, an mportant consder-aton s how to set the splt frequency.

When you push and hold the [SPLIT] swtch for 1 sec., the splt frequency operaton s turned ON, and the sub readout frequency and operatng mode s equalzed to the man readout, then enters standby for transmt frequency nput.

Ths shortens the tme needed to begn splt fre-quency operaton.

The quck splt functon s ON by default. For your convenence, t can be turned OFF n others set mode. (p. 129) In ths case, the [SPLIT] swtch does not equalze the man and sub readout frequences.

q Suppose you are operatng at 21.290 MHz (USB) n VFO mode.

w Push and hold [SPLIT] for 1 sec. • Splt frequency operaton s turned ON. • [SPLIT] ndcator lghts. • The sub readout frequency and operatng mode s

equalzed to the man readout. • The sub readout enters standby for transmt frequency

nput and “ ” appears. • Durng FM mode operaton, the sub readout frequency

shfts from the man readout frequency accordng to the others set mode settng. (p. 129)

• The tone encoder functon s turned ON n FM mode.e Rotate the man dal to set the transmt frequency;

or, nput the transmt frequency usng the keypad and [F-INP ENT]; or, nput a shft frequency usng the keypad and [SPLIT].

• “ ” dsappears when [F-INP ENT] s pushed. • Offset frequency settng wth the keypad and [SPLIT]. [Example] To transmt on 1 kHz hgher frequency: - Push [1.8 1] then [SPLIT]. To transmt on 3 kHz lower frequency: - Push [GENE •], [7 3] then [SPLIT].

D Split lock functionThe splt lock functon s convenent for changng only the transmt frequency. When the splt lock functon s not used, accdentally releasng [XFC] whle rotat-ng the man dal, changes the receve frequency. The splt lock functon s OFF by default, but can be turned ON n others set mode. (p. 129)

q Whle splt frequency operaton s ON, push and hold [SPEECH/LOCK] for 1 sec. to actvate the splt lock functon.

• [LOCK] ndcator lghts.w Whle pushng and holdng [XFC], rotate the man

dal to change the transmt frequency. • If you accdentally release [XFC] whle rotatng the

man dal, the receve frequency does NOT change.

Main dial

[SPLIT] indicator KeypadSPLIT

Main dial[LOCK] indicator

SPEECHLOCKXFC

89


About digital voice recorderThe IC-7600 has dgtal voce memores, up to 4 messages for transmt, and up to 20 messages for receve.A maxmum message length of 30 sec. can be recorded nto receve memory (total message length for all channels of up to 209 sec.) and a total mes-sage length of up to 99 sec. can be recorded n trans-mt memory.The transmt memory s very convenent for repeated CQ and exchange transmssons n contests, as well as when makng repeated calls to DX’pedtons.

q Select any mode.w Push [VOICE] (F-2) to dsplay voce recorder

screen.e Push [EXIT/SET] to dsplay voce recorder menu.r Push [PLAY] (F-1) or [MIC REC] (F-2) to select

the desred memory channel screen, then record audo or playback the contents.

t Push [EXIT/SET] twce to ext voce recorder screen.

F-2

F-1 EXIT/SET PLAYREC

PLAY

VOICE MIC REC/

• Example— When [REC] is pushed and held for 1sec.

• Example— When [REC] is pushed momentarily

• Playing back the all contents in a channel • Playing back the end of 5 sec.* in a channel

20 sec.

15 sec.(default)

30 sec. (max.) Not playing back Play back (5 sec.; default)

3 sec.

30 sec.Push REC momentarily within 30 sec. after pushing and holding REC for 1 sec., records the all contents.

Push REC momentarily records the contents of the previous 15 sec.*

When REC is pushed momentarily again within 15 sec.* from the last REC operation, all the contents between REC operations will be recorded.

Push REC momentarily after passing 30 sec. from pushing and holding REC for 1 sec., records the 30 sec. before canceling the record.

These contents won’t be recorded.

*The playing back time period can be changed with “Short Play Time” in voice set mode (p. 97).

NOTE: The contents will be recorded into an independent memory channels automatically.

Push and hold REC for 1 sec.(starts recording)

Push REC momentarily Push REC momentarily

Push REC momentarily(stops recording)

Push and hold REC for 1 sec.(starts recording)

Push REC momentarily(stops recording)

Push [PLAY] (F-3) momentarily.Or, push and hold PLAY for 1 sec. Push PLAY momentarily.

*The recording time period can be changed with “Normal Rec Time” in voice set mode (p. 97).

About recording received audio and playing back the contents

5

90

VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

Recording a received audioUp to 20 receve voce memores are avalable n the IC-7600. A total of 209 sec. of audo can be recorded n receve messages. However, the maxmum record-able length of a sngle message s 30 sec.

Ths voce recorder records not only the receved audo, but also the nformaton such as set operat-ng frequency, mode, and the recordng tme for your future reference.

D Basic recordingq Push [EXIT/SET] several tmes to close a mult-

functon screen, f necessary.w Select the desred mode.e Push [VOICE] (F-2) to call up the voce recorder

screen. • Prevously selected screen, TX or RX memory, s ds-

played. If the TX memory channel (T1–T4) appears, push [T/R] (F-6) to select RX memory channel.

r Push and hold [REC] for 1 sec. to start recordng. • The operatng frequency, mode and current tme are

programmed as the memory names automatcally.t Push [REC] momentarly to stop recordng.

IMPORTANT!Push [REC] to stop recordng before, or when 30 sec. has elapsed from the start of recordng.The voce recorder memory records 30 sec. (max.) of audo before [REC] s pushed.For example, when recordng 40 sec. of audo, the frst 10 sec. audo wll be over-wrtten wth the last 10 sec., so that the total of audo recorded s only 30 sec.When you record the 21st audo message, or when the total audo length exceeds 209 sec., the oldest recorded audo s automatcally erased to make room for the new audo.

y Push [EXIT/SET] twce to ext the voce recorder screen.

NOTE: When transmt (or [PTT] s pushed) whle recordng, no audo wll be recorded.

D One-touch recordingTo record the receved sgnal mmedately, one-touch voce recordng s avalable.

Push [REC] momentarly to store the prevous 15 sec. audo.

• The recordable tme perod can be set n voce set mode. (p. 97)

F-2 F-6 EXIT/SET

VOICE T/R

REC

The remaining time for recordingis indicated.

REC

91

5 VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS

Playing the recorded audioD Basic playingq Push [EXIT/SET] several tmes to close a mult-

functon screen, f necessary.w Push [VOICE] (F-2) to call up the voce recorder

screen. • Prevously selected screen, TX or RX memory, s ds-

played. If the TX memory message (T1–T4) appears, push [T/R] (F-6) to select RX memory message.

e Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desred voce memory to playback.

r Push [PLAY] (F-3) to start playback. • “ ” ndcators appear and the tmer counts

down.t Push [PLAY] (F-3) agan to stop playback f

desred. • Playback s termnated automatcally when all of the

recorded contents n the message are played.y Push [EXIT/SET] twce to ext the voce recorder

screen.

D One-touch playingThe prevously recorded audo n message 1 can be played back wthout selectng voce recorder screen.

Push [PLAY] momentarly to playback the last 5 sec. of the prevously recorded audo.

• To playback all contents of the prevously recorded audo, push and hold [PLAY] for 1 sec.

• “ ” ndcator appears. • Playback s termnated automatcally when all of the

recorded contents n the message are played, or after 5 sec.

• The playback tme perod can be set n voce set mode. (p. 97)

F-2

F-3

F-1

PLAY

EXIT/SET

T/R

F-6

VOICE /

Appears

Appears

Counts down

PLAY

92

5VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

Protect the recorded contentsThe protect functon s avalable to protect the recorded contents from accdental erasure, such as over-wrtng, etc.

q Call up the voce recorder screen, RX memory.w Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desred

voce message.e Push [PROTECT] (F-4) to turn the protect functon

ON and OFF. • “ ” ndcator appears when the contents s protected.r Push [EXIT/SET] twce to ext the voce recorder

screen. F-2 F-4F-1

PROTECT

EXIT/SET

Erasing the recorded contentsThe recorded contents can be erased ndependently by message.

q Call up the voce recorder screen, RX memory.w Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desred

voce message to be erased.e Push [PLAY] (F-3) to start playback. • “ ” ndcators appear and the tmer counts

down.r Push and hold [CLR] (F-6) for 1 sec. to erase the

contents. • Push [PROTECT] (F-4) to release the protecton n

advance f necessary.t Push [EXIT/SET] twce to ext the voce recorder

screen.

F-2

F-3 F-6

F-1

PLAY CLR

F-4

PROTECT

EXIT/SET

93


Recording a message for transmitTo transmt a message usng the voce recorder, record the desred message n advance as descrbed below.The IC-7600 has dgtal voce memores for transms-son, up to 4 messages and a total message length of up to 99 sec. can be recorded.

D Recordingq Push [EXIT/SET] several tmes to close a mult-

functon screen, f necessary.w Push [VOICE] (F-2) to call up the voce recorder

screen.e Push [EXIT/SET] to select voce recorder menu.r Push [MIC REC] (F-2) to select the voce mc.

record screen.t Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desred

message.y Whle speakng nto the mcrophone wth your nor-

mal voce level, adjust the [MIC GAIN] control so that the [MIC-REC LEVEL] ndcator reads wthn 100%.

u Push and hold [REC] (F-4) for 1 sec. to start recordng.

• “ ” ndcator appears. • Speak nto the mcrophone wthout pushng [PTT]. • Prevously recorded contents are cleared. • Audo output from the nternal speaker s automatcally

muted.i Push [REC] (F-4) momentarly to stop recordng. • The recordng s termnated automatcally when the

remanng tme becomes 0 sec.o Push [EXIT/SET] twce to ext the voce recorder

screen.

D Confirming a message for transmitq Perform the steps q to r as “D Recordng”

above.w Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desred

message.e Push [PLAY] (F-3) to playback the recorded con-

tents. • “ ” ndcator appears. • Push and hold [CLR] (F-6) for 1 sec. to erase the con-

tents.r Push [PLAY] (F-3) agan to stop playback. • Playback s termnated automatcally when all of the

recorded contents n the message are played.t Push [EXIT/SET] twce to ext the voce recorder

screen.

F-2

F-4

F-1

REC

EXIT/SET

VOICE

MIC REC

Appears Adjust [MIC GAIN] control so that this indicator reads within 100%.

F-2 F-3F-1

PLAY

EXIT/SET

F-6

CLR

94


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

Programming a memory nameMemory messages can be tagged wth alphanumerc names of up to 30 characters each.

Captal letters, small letters, numerals, some symbols (! # $ % & ¥ ? " ’ ` ^ + – / . , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] ¦ _ – @) and spaces can be used. (See the table below.)

q Record a message as descrbed n page 94.w Durng the voce mc. record screen ndcaton,

push [NAME] (F-5) to enter memory name edt condton.

• A cursor appears and blnks.e Push [T1..T4] (F-6) several tmes to select the

desred voce message.r Input the desred character by rotatng the man

dal or by pushng the band key for number nput. • Push [ABC] (MF6) or [abc] (MF6) to toggle captal and

small letters. • Push [123] (MF7) or [Symbol] (MF7) to toggle numer-

als and symbols. • Push [Ω] (F-1) or [≈] (F-2) for cursor movement. • Push [DEL] (F-3) to delete the selected character. • Push [SPACE] (F-4) to nput a space. • Pushng the transcever’s keypad, [0]–[9] and [.] can

also enter numerals.t Push [EXIT/SET] to nput and set the name. • The cursor dsappears.y Repeat steps e to t to program another voce

message’s name, f desred.u Push [EXIT/SET] twce to ext the voce recorder

screen.

• Usable charactersKey selection Editable characters


a to z (small letters)

0 to 9 (numbers)

! # $ % & ¥ ? “ ‘ ` ^ + – / . , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] ¦ _ – @

For your convenienceWhen a PC keyboard s connected to [USB] (A) con-nector on the front panel, the memory name can also be edted from the keyboard.

F-1 F-2 F-4F-3

DEL SPACE

F-5 F-6

EXIT/SET Main dial

Symbol ABC

123 abc T1..T4

KeypadNAME

• Voice mic. record screen

Voce memory name edtng example

95


Sending a recorded messageq Push [EXIT/SET] several tmes to close a mult-

functon screen, f necessary.w Select a phone mode by pushng [SSB] or

[AM/FM].e Push [VOICE] (F-2) to call up the voce recorder

screen. • If the receve voce message appears, push [T/R] (F-6)

to select TX message (T1–T4).r Push the desred message swtch, [T1] (F-1) to

[T4] (F-4), momentarly to transmt the contents. • The transcever transmts automatcally. • “ ” ndcator appears and the memory tmer

counts down. • You hear the transmtted message from the speaker as

the default. Ths can be turned OFF n voce set mode. (p. 97)

t Push the selected message swtch, [T1] (F-1) to [T4] (F-4), agan to stop, f desred.

• The transcever returns to receve automatcally when all of the recorded contents n the message are trans-mtted.

y Push [EXIT/SET] twce to ext the voce memory screen.

For your informationWhen an external keypad s connected to [MIC] con-nector on the front panel, or one of [F1]−[F4] key of the keyboard that s connected to the [USB] (A) con-nector on the front panel s pushed, the recorded message, T1–T4, can be transmtted wthout open-ng the voce recorder screen.See pages 18, 133, 134 for detals.

D Transmit level settingq Call up the voce recorder screen as descrbed as

above.w Push [TX LEV.] (F-5) to select the voce memory

transmt level set condton.e Push the desred message swtch, [T1] (F-1) to

[T4] (F-4), momentarly to transmt the contents. • The transcever transmts automatcally. • “ ” ndcator appears and the memory tmer

counts down.r Rotate the man dal to adjust the transmt voce

level. • Push and hold [DEF] (F-6) for 1 sec. to select the

default condton.t Push [EXIT/SET] to return to the voce recorder

screen.

F-1 F-2 F-4F-3

F-2

F-6

EXIT/SET

T3 T/RT4T2T1

SSB AM/FM

VOICE

Appears Counts down

F-1 F-2 F-4F-3

T3 T4T2T1

F-5

F-6

EXIT/SET Main dialTX LEV.

DEF

Appears Adjust the transmit voice levelfrom 0 to 100 %.

96


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

Voice set modeSets the automatc montor functon, short play and normal recordng tmes for voce recorder.


w Push [VOICE] (F-2) to call up the voce recorder screen.

e Push [EXIT/SET] to select voce recorder menu.r Push [SET] (F-6) to select voce set mode screen.t Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desred

tem.y Rotate the man dal to set the desred condton or

value. • Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select the

default condton or value.u Push [EXIT/SET] to ext the voce set mode

screen.

F-1 F-2

F-4 F-6

EXIT/SET Main dial

DEF SET

VOICE /

Auto Monitor ON

Turn on the automatc montor functon for recorded audo contents transmsson.

• ON : Montors transmt audo automatcally when sendng a recorded audo.

• OFF : Montors transmt audo only when the mon-tor functon s n use.

Short Play Time 5s

Set the desred tme perod for one-touch playback (when [PLAY] s pushed momentarly).

• 3 to 10 sec. n 1 sec. steps can be set. (default: 5 sec.)

Normal Rec Time 15s

Set the desred tme perod for one-touch recordng (when [REC] s pushed momentarly).

• 5 to 15 sec. n 1 sec. steps can be set. (default: 15 sec.)

97


Saving a voice message into the USB-MemoryD Saving the received audio memoryThe recorded RX memory contents can be saved nto the USB-Memory.

q Durng voce recorder RX memory screen dsplay, push [SAVE] (F-5) to select voce fle save screen.

• Prevously selected screen, TX or RX memory, s ds-played. If the TX message (T1–T4) appears, push [T/R] (F-6) to select RX message.

w Change the followng condtons f desred.

• File name: z Push [EDIT] (F-4) to select fle name edt con-


fle name, f necessary. x Push [ABC] (MF6), [123] (MF7) or [Symbol]

(MF7) to select the character group, then rotate the man dal to select the character.

• [ABC] (MF6) : A to Z (captal letters); [123] (MF7): 0 to 9 (numerals); [Symbol] (MF7): ! # $ % & ’ ` ^ – ( ) _ – @ can be selected.

• Push [Ω] (F-1) to move the cursor left, push [≈] (F-2) to move the cursor rght, push [DEL] (F-3) to delete a character and push [SPACE] (F-4) to nsert a space.

c Push [EXIT/SET] to set the fle name.

• Saving location z Push [DIR/FILE] (F-1) to select tree vew








e Push [SAVE] (F-5). • After the savng s completed, return to voce recorder

RX memory screen automatcally.

D Saving the TX memoryThe TX memory contents can also be saved nto the USB-Memory. However, the contents are saved wth the message lst, set mode condtons, etc. at the same tme. See page 139 for detals.


EDIT

F-4

SAVE

F-6

F-5

T/R

F-1 F-2 F-4F-3

DEL SPACE

Symbol ABC

123

F-1 EXIT/SET

DIR/FILE

Main dial

• Voice recorder RX memory screen

• Voice file save screen— file name edit

F-2 F-4F-3

REN DELMAKE

• While saving

When a PC keyboard s connected to [USB] con-nector on the front panel, the file name can also be edted from the keyboard. In ths case, a USB hub s requred.

98


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

6

99

MEMORY OPERATION

Memory channelsThe transcever has 101 memory channels. Memory mode s very useful for quck change to often-used frequences.

All 101 memory channels are tunable whch means the programmed frequency can be tuned temporarly wth the man dal, etc. n memory mode.

MEMORYCHANNEL

MEMORYCHANNELNUMBER

CAPABILITYTRANSFER

TO VFOOVER-

WRITINGCLEAR

Regular memory channels

1–99One frequency and one mode n each memory channel.

Yes Yes Yes

Scan edgememorychannels

P1, P2One frequency and one mode n each memory channel as scan edges for programmed scan.

Yes Yes No

Memory channel selectionD Using the [∫]/[√] keysq Push [VFO/MEMO] to select memory mode.w Push [∫]/[√] several tmes to select the desred

memory channel. • Push and hold [∫]/[√] for contnuous selecton. • [UP] and [DN] on the mcrophone can also be used.e To return to VFO mode, push [VFO/MEMO] agan.

D Using the keypadq Push [VFO/MEMO] to select memory mode.w Push [F-INP ENT].e Push the desred memory channel number usng

the keypad. • Enter 100 or 101 to select scan edge channel P1 or P2,

respectvely.r Push [∫] or [√] to set the memory channel.

[EXAMPLE]To select the memory channel 3;- Push [F-INP ENT], [7 3], then push [∫] or [√].

To select the memory channel 12;- Push [F-INP ENT], [1.8 1], [3.5 2], then push [∫] or

[√].

To select the scan edge channel P1;- Push [F-INP ENT], [1.8 1], [50 0], [50 0], then push

[∫] or [√].

To select the scan edge channel P2;- Push [F-INP ENT], [1.8 1], [50 0], [1.8 1], then push

[∫] or [√].

VFO/MEMO

VFO/MEMO

Keypad F-INP ENT

Memory list screenThe memory lst screen smultaneously shows 7 memory channels and ther programmed contents. 13 memory channels can be dsplayed n the wde mem-ory lst screen.

You can select a desred memory channel from the memory lst screen.

D Selecting a memory channel using the memory list screenq Push [EXIT/SET] several tmes to close a mult-

functon screen, f necessary.w Push [MEMORY] (F-4) to select memory lst

screen. • Pushng [WIDE] (F-6) swtches the standard and wde

screens.e Whle pushng and holdng [SET] (F-2), rotate the

man dal to select the desred memory channel. • [∫] and [√] can also be used.r Push [EXIT/SET] to ext memory lst screen.

MEMORY

WIDE

SET

EXIT/SET Main dialF-2 F-4

F-6

• Memory list screen

D Confirming programmed memory channelsq Select memory lst screen as descrbed above.w Whle pushng [ROLL] (F-1), rotate the man dal to

scroll the screen.e Push [SET] (F-2) to select the hghlghted memory

channel, f desred. • “≈” appears besde the selected memory channel num-

ber n the memory lst screen and the selected memory channel contents are dsplayed below the frequency readout.

r Push [EXIT/SET] to ext memory lst screen.SET

EXIT/SET Main dialF-2

ROLL

F-1

100

6MEMORY OPERATION

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

Memory channel programmingMemory channel programmng can be preformed ether n VFO mode or n memory mode.

D Programming in VFO modeq Set the desred frequency, operatng mode and fl-

ter wdth n VFO mode.w Push [∫]/[√] several tmes to select the desred

memory channel. • Memory lst screen s convenent for selectng the

desred channel. (p. 100) • Memory channel contents appear n the memory chan-

nel readout (below the frequency readout). • “--.---.--” appears f the selected memory channel s a

blank channel (and does not have contents).e Push and hold [MW] for 1 sec. to program the ds-

played frequency, operatng mode, etc., nto the memory channel.

D Programming in memory modeq Select the desred memory channel wth [∫]/[√] n

memory mode. • Memory channel contents appear n the memory chan-

nel readout nstead of the frequency readout. • No ndcaton appears f the selected memory channel

s a blank channel (and does not have contents).w Set the desred frequency and operatng mode n

memory mode. • To program a blank channel, use drect frequency entry

wth the keypad or memo pads, etc. (p. 28)e Push and hold [MW] for 1 sec. to program the ds-

played frequency and operatng mode nto the memory channel.

MW

[EXAMPLE]:Programmng 7.088 MHz/LSB nto memory channel 12.

Push for 1 sec.Beep

Beep Beep

7 3 SSB

MW

or

[EXAMPLE]:Programmng 21.280 MHz/USB nto memory channel 19.

Push for 1 sec.Beep

Beep Beep

SSB

MW

thenor 21 7

101

6 MEMORY OPERATION

Frequency transfersThe frequency and operatng mode n a memory channel can be transferred to the VFO.Frequency transfers can be performed n ether VFO mode or memory mode.

D Transferring in VFO modeThs s useful for transferrng programmed contents to a VFO.

q Select VFO mode wth [VFO/MEMO].w Select the memory channel to be transferred wth

[∫]/[√]. • Memory lst screen s convenent for selectng the

desred channel. • Memory channel contents appear n the memory chan-

nel readout (below the frequency readout). • “--.---.--” appears f the selected memory channel s a

blank channel. In ths case transferrng s not possble.e Push and hold [VFO/MEMO] for 1 sec. to transfer

the frequency and operatng mode. • Transferred frequency and operatng mode appear on

the frequency readout.

D Transferring in memory modeThs s useful for transferrng frequency and operatng mode whle operatng n memory mode.

When you have changed the frequency or operat-ng mode n the selected memory channel:• Displayed frequency, mode and flter settng are

transferred.• Programmed frequency, mode and flter n the

memory channel are not transferred, and they reman n the memory channel.

q Select the memory channel to be transferred wth [∫]/[√] n memory mode.

• Then, set the frequency or operatng mode f requred.w Push and hold [VFO/MEMO] for 1 sec. to transfer

the frequency, mode and flter. • Dsplayed frequency, mode and flter are transferred to

the VFO.e To return to VFO mode, push [VFO/MEMO]

momentarly.

TRANSFER EXAMPLE IN VFO MODEOperatng frequency : 21.320 MHz/USB (VFO)Contents of M-ch 16 : 14.018 MHz/CW

Push for 1 sec.Beep

Beep Beep

or

VFO/MEMO

TRANSFER EXAMPLE IN MEMORY MODEVFO frequency : 21.320 MHz/USBContents of M-ch 16 : 14.018 MHz/CW

Push for 1 sec.Beep

Beep Beep

Programmed contents appear.

VFO/MEMO

102

6MEMORY OPERATION

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

Memory namesAll memory channels (ncludng scan edges) can be tagged wth alphanumerc names of up to 10 charac-ters each.

Captal letters, small letters, numerals, some symbols (! # $ % & ¥ ? " ’ ` ^ + – / . , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] ¦ _ – @) and space can be used.

D Editing (programming) memory namesq Push [EXIT/SET] several tmes to close a mult-

functon screen, f necessary.w Push [MEMORY] (F-4) to select memory lst screen.e Select the desred memory channel wth [∫]/[√].r Push [NAME] (F-4) to edt memory channel name. • A cursor appears and blnks. • Memory channel names of blank channels cannot be

edted.t Input the desred character by rotatng the man

dal or by pushng the keypad for number nput. • Push [ABC] or [abc] to toggle captal and small letters. • Push [123] or [Symbol] to toggle numerals and sym-

bols. • Push [Ω] (F-1) or [≈] (F-2) for cursor movement. • Push [DEL] (F-3) to delete the selected character. • Push [SPACE] (F-4) to nput a space. • Pushng the transcever’s keypad, [0]–[9] and [.] can

also enter numerals.y Push [EXIT/SET] to nput and set the name. • The cursor dsappears.u Repeat steps e to y to program another memory

channel’s name, f desred.i Push [EXIT/SET] to ext memory lst screen.

For your convenienceWhen a PC keyboard s connected to [USB] (A) con-nector on the front panel, the memory name can also be edted from the keyboard.

Memory clearingAny unused memory channels can be cleared. The cleared memory channels become blank chan-nels.

q Select memory mode wth [VFO/MEMO].w Push [MEMORY] (F-4) to select memory lst

screen.e Select the desred memory channel wth [∫]/[√].r Push and hold [CLR] (F-5) for 1 sec. to clear the

contents. • The programmed frequency, operatng mode and flter

dsappear.t To clear other memory channels, repeat steps e

and r.

F-1 F-2 F-4F-3

DEL SPACE

F-4

EXIT/SET Main dial

Symbol ABC

123 abc

KeypadMEMORY

NAME

F-5F-4

CLR

VFO/MEMO

MEMORY

Push for 1 sec.Beep

Beep Beep

(CLR)F-5

103

6 MEMORY OPERATION

Memo padsThe transcever has a memo pad functon to store frequency and operatng mode for easy wrtng and recallng. The memo pads are separate from memory channels.

The default number of memo pads s 5, however, ths can be ncreased to 10 n set mode f desred. (p. 132)

Memo pads are convenent when you want to mem-orze a frequency and operatng mode temporarly, such as when you fnd a DX staton n a ple-up, or when a desred staton s busy for a long tme and you want to temporarly search for other statons.

Use the transcever’s memo pads nstead of relyng on hastly scrbbled notes that are easly msplaced.

MP-RMP-W

D Writing frequencies and operating modes into memo padsYou can store the readout frequency and operatng mode by pushng [MP-W].

When you store the 6th frequency and operatng mode, the oldest stored frequency and operatng mode are automatcally erased to make room for the new settngs.

Each memo pad must have ts own unque comb-naton of frequency and operatng mode; memo pads havng dentcal settngs cannot be wrtten.

MP-W

Newest

Erased

Oldest

In this example, 21.276 MHz (USB) will be erasedwhen 7.067 MHz (LSB) is written.

D Calling up a frequency from a memo padYou can call up the desred frequency and operat-ng mode of a memo pad by pushng [MP-R] several tmes.• Both VFO and memory modes can be used.• The frequency and operatng mode are called up, startng

from the most recently wrtten.

When you call up a frequency and an operatng mode from memo pads wth [MP-R], the prevously ds-played frequency and operatng mode are automat-cally stored n a temporary pad. The frequency and operatng mode n the temporary pad can be recalled by pushng [MP-R] several tmes.• You may thnk there are 6 memo pads because 6 dfferent

frequences (5 are n memo pads and 1 s n the tempo-rary pad) are called up by [MP-R].

If you change the frequency or operatng mode called up from a memo pad wth the man dal, etc., the frequency and operatng mode n the tempo-rary pad are erased.

MP-R

Newest

Oldest

MEMO PADS

MP-R

104

6MEMORY OPERATION

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

Scan types

PROGRAMMED SCANRepeatedly scans between two scan edge frequencies (scan edge memory channels P1 and P2).

This scan operates in VFO mode.

SELECT MEMORY SCANRepeatedly scans all or one of 3 select memory channels.

∂F SCANRepeatedly scans within ∂F span area.

This scan operates in memory mode.This scan operates in memory mode.

This scan operates in both VFO and memory modes.

Scan

Scan edge P1 or P2

Scan edge P2 or P1

Jump

MEMORY SCANRepeatedly scans all programmed memory channels.

Mch 11

Mch 51

Mch 22

Mch 31

Mch 4

Mch 63

Mch 71

Mch 991

Mch 11

Mch 51

Mch 22

Mch 31

Mch 4

Mch 63

Mch 71

Mch 991

Blank channel Blank channel

ScanScan

–∂F frequency +∂F frequency

Start frequency

Jump

*“1,” “2” and “3” show that the channel is specified as the select memory.

*“1,” “2” and “3” show that the channel is specified as the select memory.

Preparation• ChannelsFor programmed scan: Program scan edge frequences nto scan edge mem-ory channels P1 and P2. (p. 101)

For ∂F scan:Set the ∂F span (∂F scan range) n the scan screen.

For memory scan:Program 2 or more memory channels except scan edge memory channels.

For select memory scan:Desgnate 2 or more memory channels as select memory channels. To desgnate the channel as a select memory channel, choose a memory channel, then push [SELECT] (F-3) n the scan screen (mem-ory mode) or n the memory lst screen.

• Scan resume ON/OFFYou can select the scan to resume or cancel when detectng a sgnal n scan set mode. Scan resume ON/OFF must be set before performng a scan. See p. 106 for ON/OFF settng and scan resume condton detals.

• Scan speedScan speed can be selected from 2 levels, hgh or low, n scan set mode. See p. 106 for detals.

• Squelch condition Scan starts with squelch openFor programmed scan:

When tuning step is 1 kHz or less:The scan contnues untl t s stopped manually— t does not pause* even f sgnals are detected.* The scan s paused when the squelch s closed and

then opened (scan resumes after 10 sec. has passed when the scan resume s ON; scan s cancelled when the scan resume s OFF).

When tuning step is more than 5 kHz:The scan pauses on each step when the scan resume s ON; not applcable when the scan resume s OFF.

For memory scan:Scan pauses on each channel when the scan resume s ON; not applcable when the scan resume s OFF.

Scan starts with squelch closedScan stops when a sgnal s detected.• If the scan resume s set to ON n scan set mode, the scan

pauses for 10 sec. when detectng a sgnal, then resumes. When a sgnal dsappears whle scan s paused, scan resumes 2 sec. later.

• The scan functon can be used on the man read-out only.

• You can perform a scan whle operatng on a fre-quency usng the dualwatch or splt functons.

7

105

SCANS

Scan set modeScan speed and the scan resume condton can be set usng the scan set mode.

q Push [SCAN] (F-5) to select scan screen.w Push [SET] (F-6) to select scan set mode.e Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desred

tem.r Rotate the man dal to select the desred condton. • Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select the

default settng.t Push [EXIT/SET] to return to scan menu.

F-1 F-2 F-4 EXIT/SET Main dialDEF

F-5 F-6

SETSCAN

Scan Speed HIGH

Select the desred scan speed from hgh and low. • HIGH : scan s faster.• LOW : scan s slower.

Scan Resume ON

Set the scan resume functon ON and OFF. • ON : When detectng a sgnal, scan pauses for 10 sec., then resumes. When a sgnal ds-appears, scan resumes 2 sec. later.

• OFF : When detectng a sgnal, cancels scannng.

106

7SCANS

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

Programmed scan operationq Push [EXIT/SET] several tmes to close a mult-

functon screen, f necessary.w Select VFO mode.e Select the desred operatng mode. • The operatng mode can also be changed whle scan-

nng.r Push [SCAN] (F-5) to select the scan screen.t Set [RF/SQL] open or closed. • See p. 105 for squelch condton. • If the [RF/SQL] control functon s set as “AUTO,” the

squelch s always open n SSB, CW, RTTY and PSK modes. (pgs. 2, 33, 128)

y Push [PROG] (F-1) to start the programmed scan. • “ ” and decmal ponts blnk whle

scannng.u When the scan detects a sgnal, scan stops,

pauses or gnores t dependng on the resume set-tng and the squelch status.

i To cancel the scan, push [PROG] (F-1). • Rotatng the man dal also cancels the scan.o Push and hold [RECALL] (F-5) for 1 sec. to recall

the frequency that s set before startng the scan, f desred.

If the same frequences are programmed nto the scan edge memory channel P1 and P2, pro-grammed scan wll not start.

∂F scan operationq Push [EXIT/SET] several tmes to close a mult-

functon screen, f necessary.w Select VFO mode or a memory channel.e Select the desred operatng mode. • The operatng mode can also be changed whle scan-

nng.r Push [SCAN] (F-5) to select the scan screen.t Set [RF/SQL] open or closed. • See p. 105 for squelch condton. • If the [RF/SQL] control functon s set as “AUTO,” the


y Set the ∂F span by pushng [∂F SPAN] (F-4). • ±5 kHz, ±10 kHz, ±20 kHz, ±50 kHz, ±100 kHz,

±500 kHz and ±1000 kHz are selectable.u Rotate the man dal to set a center frequency of

the ∂F span.i Push [∂F] (F-2) to start the ∂F scan. • “ ” and decmal ponts blnk whle scannng.o When the scan detects a sgnal, the scan stops,

pauses or gnores t dependng on the resume set-tng and the squelch status.

!0 To cancel the scan, push [∂F] (F-2). • Rotatng the man dal also cancels the scan.!1 Push and hold [RECALL] (F-5) for 1 sec. to recall

the frequency that was set before startng the scan.

F-1 F-5 EXIT/SET Main dial[RF/SQL]PROG SCAN

RECALL

F-2 F-4

∂F SPAN∂F

F-5

EXIT/SET[RF/SQL]

SCAN RECALL/

107

7 SCANS

Fine programmed scan/Fine ∂F scanIn fne scan (programmed or ∂F), the scan speed decreases when the squelch opens, but the trans-cever keeps scannng. The scannng tunng step shfts from 50 Hz to 10 Hz when the squelch opens.


w Push [SCAN] (F-5) to select the scan screen.e Set for programmed scan or ∂F scan as descrbed

on prevous page.r Push [PROG] (F-1) or [∂F] (F-2) to start a scan. • “ ” or “ ” and decmal

ponts blnk whle scannng.t Push [FINE] (F-3) to start a fne scan. • “ ” or “ ”

blnks nstead of “ ” or “ , ” respectvely.

y When the scan detects a sgnal, the scan speed decreases but scan does not stop.

u Push [PROG] (F-1) or [∂F] (F-2) to stop the scan; push [FINE] (F-3) to cancel the fne scan.

• Rotatng the man dal also cancels the scan.i Push and hold [RECALL] (F-5) for 1 sec. to recall

the frequency that s set before startng the scan, f desred.

F-1 F-5 EXIT/SET Main dialPROG SCAN

RECALL

F-3F-2

∂F FINE

108

7SCANS

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

Memory scan operationq Push [EXIT/SET] several tmes to close a mult-

functon screen, f necessary.w Select memory mode.e Push [SCAN] (F-5) to select the scan screen.r Set [RF/SQL] open or closed. • See p. 105 for squelch condton. • If the [RF/SQL] control functon s set as “AUTO,” the


t Push [MEMO] (F-1) to start the memory scan. • “ ” and decmal ponts blnk whle

scannng.y When the scan detects a sgnal, the scan stops,

pauses or gnores t dependng on the resume set-tng and the squelch condton.

u To cancel the scan, push [MEMO] (F-1) . • Rotatng the man dal also cancels the scan.

2 or more memory channels must be programmed for memory scan to start.

Select memory scan operationq Push [EXIT/SET] several tmes to close a mult-

functon screen, f necessary.w Select memory mode.e Push [SCAN] (F-5) to select the scan screen.r Set [RF/SQL] open or closed. • See p. 105 for squelch condton. • If the [RF/SQL] control functon s set as “AUTO,” the


t Push [MEMO] (F-1) to start the memory scan. • “ ” and decmal ponts blnk whle

scannng.yPush [SEL No.] (F-4) several tmes to select the

select scan number from 1, 2, 3 and 1,2,3.u Push [SELECT] (F-3) to start select memory scan;

push [SELECT] (F-3) agan to return to memory scan, f desred.

• “ ” b l nks ns tead o f “ ” durng select memory scan.

i When the scan detects a sgnal, the scan stops, pauses or gnores t dependng on the resume set-tng and the squelch condton.

o To cancel the scan, push [MEMO] (F-1). • Rotatng the man dal also cancels the scan.

2 or more memory channels must be desgnated as select memory channels, as well as the same select scan channel number, for select memory scan to start.

F-1 F-5 EXIT/SET Main dial[RF/SQL]SCANMEMO

F-3

SELECT

F-1

F-4 F-5

EXIT/SET Main dial[RF/SQL]

SCAN

MEMO

SEL No.

109

7 SCANS

Setting select memory channelsD Setting in scan screenq Push [EXIT/SET] several tmes to close a mult-

functon screen, f necessary.w Select memory mode.e Push [SCAN] (F-5) to select the scan screen.r Select the desred memory channel to set as a

select memory channel. • [∫]/[√] keys and drect keypad selectons can be used.

(p. 99)t Push [SELECT] (F-3) several tmes to set the

memory channel as a select memory 1, 2, 3 or not.

• “1,” “2” or “3” appears on the LCD to show that the channel s specfed as the select memory.

y Repeat steps r to t to program another memory channel as a select memory channel.

u Push [EXIT/SET] to ext the scan screen.

D Setting in memory list screenq Push [EXIT/SET] several tmes to close a mult-


screen.e Rotate the man dal whle pushng [ROLL] (F-1) or

[SET] (F-2) to select the desred memory channel. • [∫]/[√] keys and drect keypad selectons can be used.

(p. 99)r Push [SELECT] (F-3) several tmes to set the

memory channel as a select memory 1, 2, 3 or not.

• “1,” “2” or “3” appears on the LCD to show that the channel s specfed as the select memory.

t Repeat steps e to r to program another memory channel as a select memory channel.

y Push [EXIT/SET] to ext the memory lst screen.

D Erasing the select scan settingq Push [EXIT/SET] several tmes to close a mult-


screen, or push [SCAN] (F-5) to select scan screen.

e Push and hold [SELECT] (F-3) for 1 sec. to dsplay memory select all clear wndow.

r Push one of the followng keys to clear all select scan settngs.

[1] (F-1) : Clears all 1 settngs. [2] (F-2) : Clears all 2 settngs. [3] (F-3) : Clears all 3 settngs. [1,2,3] (F-4) : Clears all select settngs.t Push [EXIT/SET] to ext the memory lst screen.

EXIT/SET

F-3

F-5F-1 F-2 VFO/MEMO

SCAN

SELECT

F-4

MEMORY

ROLL SET

• Scan screen

• Memory list screen

F-5

SCAN

F-3

SELECT

F-1 F-2 F-3

11 2 3

F-4

1,2,3

F-4

MEMORY

EXIT/SET

110

7SCANS

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

Tone scanThe transcever can detect subaudble tones n a receved sgnal. By montorng a sgnal that s beng transmtted on a repeater nput frequency, you can determne the tone frequency requred to access the repeater.

q Set the desred frequency or memory channel to be checked for a tone frequency.

w Push [AM/FM] several tmes to select FM mode.e Push and hold [TONE] (MF7) for 1 sec. to enter

tone frequency screen.r Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to check the repeater

tone frequency or tone squelch frequency, respec-tvely.

t Push [T-SCAN] (F-6) to start the tone scan. • “SCAN” blnks whle scannng.y When a matchng tone frequency s detected, the

tone scan pauses. • The tone frequency s set temporarly on a memory

channel. Program the memory channel to store the tone frequency permanently.

• The decoded tone frequency s used for the repeater tone frequency or tone squelch frequency.

u To stop the scan, push [T-SCAN] (F-6). • Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select the

default frequency.i Push [EXIT/SET] to ext tone frequency screen.

F-1 F-2 EXIT/SETAM/FM

TONE

T-SCANDEF

F-4 F-6

111

7 SCANS

Automatic antenna selectionThe transcever covers 0.03–60 MHz over 10 bands. Each band key has a band memory whch can mem-orze a selected antenna (ANT1, ANT2, ANT1/RX antenna and ANT2/RX antenna). When you change the operatng frequency beyond a band, the prev-ously used antenna s automatcally selected. Ths functon s convenent when you use 2 or 3 antennas.

To use the band memory, enter set mode and con-frm that “Auto” s selected as the [ANT] swtch tem. (p. 130)

• Antenna selection mode: “Auto” (default)The antenna tuner ON/OFF condton s also memo-rzed n the band memory.

[Example]: a 3.5/7 MHz antenna s connected to [ANT1], a 21/28/50 MHz antenna s connected to [ANT2]. When the antenna selector functon s set to “Auto,” an antenna s automatcally selected when the transcever changes bands.

• Antenna selection mode: “Manual”[ANT] (MF1) functons, however, band memory does not functon. In ths case, you must select an antenna manually.When usng an external antenna selector for more than 3 antennas (except for receve antenna), “Manual” should be selected as the [ANT] swtch set mode tem. (p. 130)

NOTE: When “Auto” or “Manual” s selected, the antenna tuner ON/OFF condton s consstent wth [ANT] (MF1).

• Antenna selection mode: “OFF”[ANT] (MF1) does not functon and [ANT1] s always selected.

3.5/7 MHzbands

21/28/50 MHzbands

RXonly

ANT1 ANT2

RX ANTIN

ANT

8

112

ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

Antenna tuner operationThe nternal automatc antenna tuner matches the transcever to the connected antenna automatcally. After the tuner matches an antenna, the varable capac-tor settngs are memorzed as a preset pont for each frequency range (100 kHz steps). Therefore, when you change the frequency range, the varable capactors are automatcally preset to the memorzed settng.

CAUTION: NEVER transmt wth the tuner ON when no antenna s connected. Ths wll damage the transcever. Be careful of the antenna selecton.

For your convenienceWhen you purchase a brand-new antenna, or you want to change the antenna settngs, you can erase the all of the nternal antenna tuner preset ponts wth “Tuner Preset Memory Clear” n others set mode. (p. 130)

D Tuner operation Push [TUNER] to turn the nternal antenna tuner

ON. The antenna s tuned automatcally when the antenna SWR s hgher than 1.5:1.

• When the tuner s ON, the ndcator on the swtch lghts green.

• Whle tunng, the ndcator on the swtch blnks.

D Manual tuningDurng SSB operaton at low voce levels, the nternal tuner may not automatcally tune correctly. In such cases, manual tunng s helpful. Push and hold [TUNER] for 1 sec., to start man-

ual tunng. • A sdetone s emtted and the ndcator on the

swtch blnks red whle tunng. • If the tuner cannot reduce the SWR to less than

1.5:1 after 20 sec. of tunng, the ndcator on the swtch goes out.

NOTES:• NEVER transmt wthout an antenna properly con-

nected to antenna port n use.• When 2 antennas are connected, select the

antenna to be used wth [ANT] (MF1).• If the SWR s hgher than about 1.5:1 when tun-

ng farther than 100 kHz from an antenna’s pro-grammed preset pont, push and hold [TUNER] for 1 sec. to start manual tunng.

• The nternal tuner may not be able to tune n AM mode. In such cases, push and hold [TUNER] for 1 sec. to manually tune.

TUNER

113

8 ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION

If the tuner cannot tune the antennaCheck the following and try again:• the [ANT] connector selecton.• the antenna connecton and feedlne.• the untuned antenna SWR. (Less than 3:1 for HF

bands; Less than 2.5:1 for 50 MHz band)• the transmt power. (8 W for HF bands; 15 W for

50 MHz band)• the power source voltage/capacty.

If the tuner cannot reduce the SWR to less than 1.5:1 after checkng the above, perform the followng:• repeat manual tunng several tmes.• adjust the antenna feedlne length. (Ths s effectve

for hgher frequences n some cases.)

Even f the manual tune does not tune the antenna and the tuner turns OFF at the frst tme, t may tune the antenna at the second tme.

Tuning a narrow bandwidth antennaSome antennas, especally for the low bands, have a narrow bandwdth. These antennas may not be tuned beyond the edge of ther operatng bandwdth, therefore, tune such an antenna as follows:

[Example]: Suppose you have an antenna whch has an SWR of 1.5:1 at 3.55 MHz and an SWR of 3:1 at 3.8 MHz.

q Set 3.55 MHz and push and hold [TUNER] for 1 sec. to start manual tunng.

w Set 3.80 MHz and push and hold [TUNER] for 1 sec. to start manual tunng.

Optional external tuner operation• AH-4 HF AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNERThe AH-4 matches the IC-7600 to a long wre antenna more than 7 m/23 ft long (3.5 MHz and above).• See p. 18 for the transcever and AH-4 connecton.• See the AH-4 nstructon manual for AH-4 nstalla-

ton and antenna connecton detals.

AH-4 setting example:

For mobile operation

For outdoor operation

Long wire

Optional AH-2bantenna element

R DANGER: HIGH VOLTAGE! NEVER touch the antenna element whle tunng

or transmttng.

NEVER operate the AH-4 wthout an antenna wre. The tuner and transcever wll be damaged.

NEVER operate the AH-4 when t s not grounded.

Transmttng before tunng may damage the trans-cever. Note that the AH-4 cannot tune when usng a ½λ long wre or multple of the operatng frequency.

When connectng the AH-4, the antenna connector assgnments are [ANT2] for the nternal tuner and [ANT1] for the AH-4. The antenna ndcator n the LCD dsplays “ANT1(EXT)” when the AH-4 s con-nected and selected.

• AH-4 operationTunng s requred for each frequency. Be sure to re-tune the antenna before transmttng when you change the frequency— even slghtly.

q Set the desred frequency n an HF or 50 MHz band for use wth the AH-4.

• The AH-4 wll not operate on frequences outsde of ham bands.

w Push and hold [TUNER] for 1 sec. • The ndcator on the swtch blnks whle tunng.

TUNER

e The ndcator on the swtch lghts constantly when tunng s complete.

• When the connected wre cannot be tuned, the ndcator on the swtch goes out and the AH-4 s bypassed. At that pont the antenna wre connec-ton s to the transcever drectly, and not va the AH-4 antenna tuner.

r To bypass the AH-4 manually, push [TUNER].

NOTE: PTT tuner functon s also avalable. See p. 129 for detals.

• Antenna tuner of the IC-PW1/EUROWhen usng an external antenna tuner such as the IC-PW1/EURO’s tuner, tune wth the external antenna tuner, whle the nternal tuner s turned OFF. After tun-ng s completed, turn the nternal tuner ON.Otherwse, both tuners tune smultaneously and cor-rect tunng may not be obtaned.See the nstructon manual ncluded wth each antenna tuner for ther respectve operatons.

114

8ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

• Automatic tuner start (HF bands only)If you want to deactvate the tuner under condtons of VSWR 1.5:1 or less, use the auto tuner start func-ton and turn the tuner OFF. Ths functon actvates the tuner automatcally when the SWR s hgh.Ths functon s controlled n set mode. (p. 129).• The tuner may not be actvated f the TX power s not

output stably longer than the specfed tme perod as SSB or CW mode operaton.

• PTT tuner startTunng of the nternal*/external antenna tuner starts when [PTT] s pushed on a new frequency (more than 1% from last-tuned frequency). Ths functon removes the “push and hold [TUNER]” operaton and actvates for the frst transmsson on a new frequency.*Tunng starts f the nternal antenna tuner s ON.Ths functon s turned ON n set mode. (p. 129).

9

115

CLOCK AND TIMERS

Clock set mode

F-1 F-2 F-4

F-6

EXIT/SET Main dial

SET

TIMECLOCK /

The IC-7600 has a bult-n calendar and 24-hour clock (accuracy ±75 sec. per month) wth daly power ON/OFF tmer functons. Before operatng these tmer functons, set the current date and tme.

q Push [EXIT/SET] several tmes to close mult-func-ton screen, f necessary.

w Push [SET] (F-6) to select set mode menu screen.e Push [TIME] (F-4) to select tme set mode.r Push [CLOCK] (F-1) to select clock set mode.t Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desred

tem, then rotate the man dal to set or select the desred value or condton.

• Pushng [Ω≈] (F-3) operaton may be necessary for some tems.

• Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) to select a default condton or value.

y Push [EXIT/SET] to ext tme set mode.

Date 2000 – 1 – 1 ( Sat )Sets the date. z Push [Ω ≈] (F-3) to select between the year and the

month/day, then rotate the man dal to select them. • The date settng and “DATE-set Push [SET]” ndca-

ton blnk.x Push [SET] (F-5) to set the date.

Time (Now) 0:00Sets the local tme. z Rotate the man dal to set the local tme.

• The tme settng and “TIME-set Push [SET]” ndcaton blnk.

x Push [SET] (F-5) to set the tme.

CLOCK2 Function ONTurns the CLOCK2 ndcator ON and OFF.CLOCK2 s convenent to ndcate UTC or other country’s local tme, etc.

• ON : The CLOCK2 ndcator s dsplayed below the local tme ndcaton.

• OFF : The CLOCK2 ndcator does not dsplay.

CLOCK2 Offset ± 0:00Sets the desred off-set tme perod for CLOCK2 ds-play wthn –24:00 to +24:00 n 5 mn. steps.

CLOCK2 Name UTCSets the desred 3-character name for CLOCK2.Captal letters, small letters, numerals, some sym-bols (! # $ % & ¥ ? " ’ ` ^ + – ⁄ . , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] ¦ _ – @) and spaces can be used.

z Push [EDIT] (F-5) to select the name edt condton. • The cursor under the 1st character blnks.x Push [ABC]/[abc] (MF6) or [123]/[Symbol]

(MF7) to select the character group, then rotate the man dal to select the character.

• Push [ABC] or [abc] to toggle captal and small letters. • Push [123] or [Symbol] to toggle numerals and symbols. • Push [Ω] (F-1) or [≈] (F-2) for cursor movement. • Push [DEL] (F-3) to delete the selected character. • Push [SPACE] (F-4) to nput a space. • Pushng the transcever’s keypad, [0]–[9] and [.] can

also enter numerals.c Push [EXIT/SET] to set the name.

116

9CLOCK AND TIMERS

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

Daily timer setting

F-1 F-2 F-4F-3 F-5

TIMER2TIMER1 TIMER5TIMER4TIMER3

F-2 F-4

F-6

TIME

EXIT/SET Main dial

SET

TIMER

• Timer set mode screen

• During [Timer1] is selected

F-1 F-2 F-4 F-6

SETCLR

The transcever turns power ON and/or OFF automat-cally on the specfed day and tme, wth the specfed frequency settngs.


w Push [SET] (F-6) to select set mode menu screen.e Push [TIME] (F-4) to select tme set mode.r Push [TIMER] (F-2) to select tmer set mode.t Push one of [TIMER1] (F-1) to [TIMER5] (F-5) to

select the desred tmer.y Rotate the man dal to select the tmer acton ON

and OFF.u Push [≈] (F-2) to select the “DAY” cell, then rotate

the man dal to select the desred day of the week. • Select “– – –” not to specfy the day of the week. The

tmer wll functon every day n ths case. • Once a day of the week s selected, push [CLR] (F-4)

to select “– – –.” i Push [≈] (F-2) to select the “REPEAT” cell, then

rotate the man dal to select the repeat functon ON and OFF.

• ON : The tmer functons every selected day of the week (repeats).

• OFF : The tmer does not repeat.o Push [≈] (F-2) to select the “ON” cell, then rotate

the man dal to set the desred transcever power ON tme.

• When usng power OFF tmer only, push [CLR] (F-4) to select “– – – –.” Ths settng cannot be set when the power OFF tmer s set to “– – – –.”

!0 Push [≈] (F-2) to select the “OFF” cell, then rotate the man dal to set the desred transcever power OFF tme.

• When usng power ON tmer only, push [CLR] (F-4) to select “– – – –.” Ths settng cannot be set when the power ON tmer s set to “– – – –.”

!1 Push [≈] (F-2) to select the “Mch” cell, then rotate the man dal to select the desred memory channel number.

• If usng the currently set VFO condton, push [CLR] (F-4) to select “– – –.”

!2 Push [SET] (F-6) to set the tmer. • The tmer ndcator appears.!3 Repeat steps t to !2 to set other tmers, f desred.!4 Push [EXIT/SET] to ext tmer set screen.

Setting sleep timer

F-2 F-4

F-6

EXIT/SET Main dialTIMER

SET SLEEP/

TIME CLR/

TIMERPOWER

• Sleep timer set condition

The sleep tmer turns the transcever power OFF automatcally after passng the set perod. The tmer can be set to 5–120 mn. n 5 mn. steps.

The sleep tmer functon counts the ‘mnute’ unts, and does not count the ‘second’ unts. For exam-ple, when the sleep tmer s started at 12:00 59, Frst one mnute past for just 1 sec. The maxmum error s therefore 59 sec. Ths s normal, not a mal-functon.


w Push [SET] (F-6) to select set mode menu screen.e Push [TIME] (F-4) to select tme set mode.r Push [TIMER] (F-2) to select tmer set mode.t Push [SLEEP] (F-6) to select the sleep tmer set

condton. • “– – –” blnks.y Set the desred tme perod usng the man dal. • “TIMER–set Push [SET]” blnks. • Push [CLR] (F-4) to select “– – –” to cancel the settng.u Push [SET] (F-6) to set the tme. • Push [EXIT/SET] to cancel the settng. • The tmer ndcator appears.i Push [EXIT/SET] to ext tmer set screen.o The transcever emts 10 beeps and turns OFF

after the sleep tmer perod elapses. • The tmer ndcator blnks whle beepng. • Push [POWER] momentarly to cancel the sleep tmer,

f desred.

Timer operationTIMER

POWERq Preset the daly tmer as descrbed on prevously to

turn the tmer functon ON. • The tmer ndcator appears.w Push and hold [POWER] for 1 sec. to turn the

power OFF. • The ndcator on ths swtch lghts red when the tmer

functon s ON.e When the set tme arrves, the power s automat-

cally turned ON.r The transcever emts 10 beeps and turns OFF

after the power-off perod elapses. • The tmer ndcator blnks whle beepng. • Push [POWER] momentarly to turn the tmer functon

OFF, f desred.

Tmer acton n the tmer set screen must be selected ON to enable tmer operaton, descrbed n page 116 step y.

117

9 CLOCK AND TIMERS

Appears

Set mode descriptionSet mode s used for programmng nfrequently changed values or condtons of functons. The IC-7600 has a level set mode, dsplay set mode, tme set mode, accessory set mode, others set mode and USB-Memory set menu.

D Set mode operation

F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6

LEVEL OTHERSTIMEDISPACC

EXIT/SET

USB

SET

F-6

• Set mode screen

F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4

F-6

Main dial

WIDE

DEF



set mode menu screen.e Push [LEVEL] (F-1), [ACC] (F-2), [DISP] (F-3),

[TIME] (F-4), [OTHERS] (F-5) or [USB] (F-6) to enter the desred set mode.

r For level, accessory, dsplay and Others set mode, push [WIDE] (F-6) to toggle wde and normal screen.

t Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desred tem, then rotate the man dal to adjust/select the desred value or condton.

• Pushng [Ω≈] (F-3) operaton may be necessary for some tems.

• Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) select a default condton or value.

y Push [EXIT/SET] twce to ext set mode.

10

118

SET MODE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

D Screen arrangement

• Set mode menu screen (p. 118)

• Level set mode (p. 120)

• ACC set mode (p. 124)

• Time set mode (p. 115)

• Display set mode (p. 126)

• Others set mode (p. 128)

• USB-Memory set menu (p. 136)

F-3

F-4

F-5

F-6F-2

F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6

119

10 SET MODE

Level set mode

SSB RX HPF/LPF – – – – – – –Sets the hgh-pass flter (100 to 2000 Hz) and low-pass flter (500 to 2400 Hz) of the receve audo n 100 Hz steps n SSB mode. (default: OFF)

NOTE: When ths settng s actve, below 2 tems wll be reset to default value, ‘0.’

SSB RX Tone (Bass) 0Sets the bass level of the receve audo tone n SSB mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)

SSB RX Tone (Treble) 0Sets the treble level of the receve audo tone n SSB mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)

AM RX HPF/LPF – – – – – – –Sets the hgh-pass flter (100 to 2000 Hz) and low-pass flter (500 to 2400 Hz) of the receve audo n 100 Hz steps n AM mode. (default: OFF)


AM RX Tone (Bass) 0Sets the bass level of the receve audo tone n AM mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)

AM RX Tone (Treble) 0Sets the treble level of the receve audo tone n AM mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)

FM RX HPF/LPF – – – – – – –Sets the hgh-pass flter (100 to 2000 Hz) and low-pass flter (500 to 2400 Hz) of the receve audo n 100 Hz steps n FM mode. (default: OFF)


FM RX Tone (Bass) 0Sets the bass level of the receve audo tone n FM mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)

FM RX Tone (Treble) 0Sets the treble level of the receve audo tone n FM mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)


120

10SET MODE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

Level set mode (Contnued)

CW RX HPF/LPF – – – – – – –

Sets the hgh-pass flter (100 to 2000 Hz) and low-pass flter (500 to 2400 Hz) of the receve audo n 100 Hz steps n CW mode. (default: OFF)

RTTY RX HPF/LPF – – – – – – –

Sets the hgh-pass flter (100 to 2000 Hz) and low-pass flter (500 to 2400 Hz) of the receve audo n 100 Hz steps n RTTY mode. (default: OFF)

PSK RX HPF/LPF – – – – – – –

Sets the hgh-pass flter (100 to 2000 Hz) and low-pass flter (500 to 2400 Hz) of the receve audo n 100 Hz steps n PSK mode. (default: OFF)

SSB TX Tone (Bass) 0

Sets the bass level of the transmt audo tone n SSB mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)

SSB TX Tone (Treble) 0

Sets the treble level of the transmt audo tone n SSB mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)

AM TX Tone (Bass) 0

Sets the bass level of the transmt audo tone n AM mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)

AM TX Tone (Treble) 0

Sets the treble level of the transmt audo tone n AM mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)

FM TX Tone (Bass) 0

Sets the bass level of the transmt audo tone n FM mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)

FM TX Tone (Treble) 0

Sets the treble level of the transmt audo tone n FM mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)

121

10 SET MODE

SSB TBW (WIDE) 100 – 2900

Sets the transmsson passband wdth to a wde set-tng by changng the lower and hgher cut-off fre-quences.

• Lower freq. : 100 (default), 200, 300 and 500 Hz• Hgher freq. : 2500, 2700, 2800 and

2900 Hz (default)

SSB TBW (MID) 300 – 2700

Sets the transmsson passband wdth to a mddle settng by changng the lower and hgher cut-off fre-quences.

• Lower freq. : 100, 200, 300 (default) and 500 Hz• Hgher freq. : 2500, 2700 (default), 2800

and 2900 Hz

SSB TBW (NAR) 500 – 2500

Sets the transmsson passband wdth to a narrow settng by changng the lower and hgher cut-off fre-quences.

• Lower freq. : 100, 200, 300 and 500 Hz (default)• Hgher freq. : 2500 (default), 2700, 2800

and 2900 Hz

Drive Gain 50%

Sets the drve gan level from 0% to 100% n 1% steps. (default: 50%)Whle talkng nto the mcrophone, keyng down or transmttng, rotate the man dal so that the ALC meter readng s between 30% to 50% of the ALC scale. (p. 37)

The drve gan s actve for all modes other than SSB mode wth speech compressor OFF.

Speech Level 50%

Sets the voce syntheszer audo output level from 0% to 100% n 1% steps. (default: 50%)

Side Tone Level 50%

Sets the sdetone output level from 0% to 100% n 1% steps. (default: 50%)

Side Tone Level Limit ON

Turns the sdetone output level lmtng capablty ON and OFF. (default: ON)

When ths tem s set to ON, the CW sdetone s lnked to the [AF] control untl rotaton of the [AF] control reaches to the specfed level—further rota-ton wll not ncrease the volume of the CW sdet-ones.

• OFF : CW sdetone level s lnked to the [AF] con-trol.

• ON : CW sdetone level s lmted wth the [AF] control.


122

10SET MODE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

Level set mode (Contnued)

Beep Level 50%Sets the beep output level from 0% to 100% n 1% steps. (default: 50%)

Beep Level Limit ON

Turns the beep tone output level lmtng capabl-ty ON and OFF for the confrmaton and band edge beep tones. (default: ON)

When ths tem s set to ON, the beep tones are lnked to the [AF] control untl rotaton of the [AF] control reaches to the specfed level—further rota-ton wll not ncrease the volume of the beep tones.

• OFF : Beep level s lnked to the [AF] control.• ON : Beep level s lmted wth the [AF] control.

123

10 SET MODE

ACC set mode

USB Audio SQL OFF (OPEN)Sets the squelch condton of the USB audo whch s output from the [USB] (B) connector on the rear panel.The same audo sgnals are output from [USB] (B) and the ACC sockets.• The beep tones and the voce syntheszer announce-

ments are not output.• The receved audo output level cannot be adjusted wth

the [AF] control.

• OFF (OPEN) : The receved audo s always output regardless of the squelch condton. (default)

• ON : The receved audo s output accord-ng to the squelch condton (open/close).

USB MOD Level 50%

Sets the nput modulaton level of the [USB] (B) con-nector from 0% to 100% n 1% steps. (default: 50%)

DATA OFF MOD MIC,ACC

Selects the desred connector(s) for modulaton nput when data mode s not n use.

• MIC : Use the sgnals from [MIC].• ACC : Use the sgnals from [ACC1] (pn 4).• MIC,ACC : Use the sgnals from [MIC] and [ACC1]

(pn 4). (default)• USB : Use the sgnals from [USB] (B).

DATA1 MOD ACC

Selects the desred connector(s) for modulaton nput when data 1 mode (D1) s n use.

• MIC : Use the sgnals from [MIC].• ACC : Use the sgnals from [ACC1] (pn 4).

(default)• MIC,ACC : Use the sgnals from [MIC] and [ACC1]

(pn 4).• USB : Use the sgnals from [USB] (B).

DATA2 MOD MIC,ACC

Selects the desred connector(s) for modulaton nput when data 2 mode (D2) s n use.

• MIC : Use the sgnals from [MIC].• ACC : Use the sgnals from [ACC1] (pn 4).• MIC,ACC : Use the sgnals from [MIC] and [ACC1]

(pn 4). (default)• USB : Use the sgnals from [USB] (B).

DATA3 MOD MICSelects the desred connector(s) for modulaton nput when data 3 mode (D3) s n use.

• MIC : Use the sgnals from [MIC]. (default)• ACC : Use the sgnals from [ACC1] (pn 4).• MIC,ACC : Use the sgnals from [MIC] and [ACC1]

(pn 4).• USB : Use the sgnals from [USB] (B).


124

10SET MODE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

ACC set mode (Contnued)

SEND Relay Type LeadSelects the swtchng relay type for [RELAY] from Lead and MOSFET.

Select the sutable relay type when connectng a non-Icom lnear amplfer.

• Lead : Use mechancal relay. (16 V DC/0.5 A max.; default)

• MOS-FET : Use semconductor type relay. (250 V/200 mA max.)

External Meter Output Auto

Selects the desred tem for an external meter nd-caton.

• Auto : Outputs the recevng sgnal strength level durng receve, and outputs the selected level (selected wth [METER]), durng transmt. (default)

• S : Outputs the recevng sgnal strength level durng receve.

• Po : Outputs the transmttng power level dur-ng transmt.

• SWR : Outputs the VSWR level durng transmt.• ALC : Outputs the ALC level durng transmt.• COMP : Outputs the compresson level durng

transmt.• Vd : Outputs the dran termnal voltage of the

fnal amplfer MOSFETs.• Id : Outputs the dran current of the fnal

amplfer MOSFETs.

External Meter Level 50%

Sets the output level for an external meter ndcaton wth n 0% to 100% range n 1% steps.

• Approx. 2.5 V at 50% (default) settng for full-scale nd-caton. (4.7 kø mpedance)

REF Adjust 50 % (Example)

Adjusts the nternal reference sgnal frequency wthn 0% to 100% range n 1% steps durng fre-quency calbraton.

NOTE: Default settng s dfferent for each trans-cever.

125

10 SET MODE

Display set mode

Bright (LCD) 50%

Adjusts the LCD unt brghtness from 0% (dark) to 100% (brght) range n 1% steps. (default: 50%)

Backlight (Switches) 80Adjusts the swtch ndcators brghtness from 1 (dark) to 100 (brght) range n 1 steps. (default: 80)

Display Type ASelects the desred dsplay type from A (Black back) and B (Blue back). (default: A)

See p. 146 for detals.

Display Font BasicSelects the desred font for frequency readout from Basc, Italc and Round. (default: Basc)


Meter Response MIDSet meter needle response from SLOW, MID and FAST. (default: MID)

Ths settng s effectve for the standard and edge-wse meter type selectons only.

Meter Type (Normal Screen) StandardSelects the desred S/RF meter type durng normal screen ndcaton from Standard, Edgewse and Bar.(default: Standard)

Meter Type (Wide Screen) BarSelects the desred S/RF meter type durng wde screen or mn scope ndcaton from Edgewse and Bar. (default: Bar)

Meter Peak Hold (Bar) ONTurns the meter peak hold functon ON and OFF. (default: ON)

Ths functon s used for the bar meter only.

Memory Name ONSets the memory name ndcaton, durng memory mode operaton, ON and OFF. (default: ON)

• OFF : No memory name s dsplayed even a mem-ory name s programmed.

• ON : The programmed memory name s ds-played above the frequency ndcaton.

Contnues to the next page.126

10SET MODE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

Dsplay set mode (Contnued)

APF−Width Popup (APF OFFON) ON

Selects the pop-up dsplay for the APF flter wdth from ON and OFF. (default: ON)

MN−Q Popup (MN OFFON) ON

Enables the pop-up ndcaton capablty when the notch flter wdth s changed from ON to OFF. (default: ON)

Screen Saver Function 60min

Turns the screen saver functon ON (15, 30 or 60 mnutes) and OFF. (default: 60 mn.)

The screen saver wll actvate when no operaton s performed for the selected tme perod to protect the LCD from the “burn-n” effect.

Screen Saver Type BoundSelects the screen saver type from “Bound,” “Rotaton” and “Twst.” (default: Bound)

The screen saver ndcaton can be dsplayed for your reference whle pushng and holdng [PREVIEW] (F-5).

Opening Message ON

Turns the openng message screen ndcaton capa-blty ON and OFF. (default: ON)

My Call

Sets the ntroductory text, up to 10-character long, dsplayed n the openng screen.Usually, you set your call sgn for the openng screen.Captal letters, numerals, some symbols (– / . @) and spaces can be used.

When a PC keyboard s connected to [USB] con-nector on the front panel, the call sgn can also be edted from the keyboard.

z Push [EDIT] (F-5) to select the name edt cond-ton.

• The cursor under the 1st character blnks.x Push [ABC] (MF6), [123] (MF7) or [Symbol] (MF7)


• Push [123] (MF7) or [Symbol] (MF7) to toggle numerals and symbols.

• Push [Ω] (F-1) or [≈] (F-2) for cursor movement. • Push [DEL] (F-3) to delete the selected character. • Push [SPACE] (F-4) to nput a space. • Pushng the transcever’s keypad, [0]–[9] and [.] can

also enter numerals.c Push [EXIT/SET] to set the name.

127

10 SET MODE

Others set mode

Calibration Marker OFFThs tem s used for a smple frequency check of the transcever. (default: OFF)See p. 147 for calbraton procedure.

NOTE: Turn the calbraton marker OFF after checkng the frequency of the transcever.

• OFF : Calbraton marker OFF• ON : Calbraton marker ON

Beep (Confirmation) ONA beep sounds each tme a swtch s pushed to con-frm t. Ths functon can be turned OFF for slent operaton. (default: ON)


• OFF : Confrmaton beep OFF• ON : Confrmaton beep ON

Beep (Band Edge) ON (Default)A beep sounds when an operatng frequency enters or exts an amateur band. Ths functons ndepen-dent of the confrmaton beep settng (above).


When “ON (User)” or “ON (User) & TX Lmt” s selected, [BAND] appears n the dsplay above the functon swtch (F-5), and up to 30 band edge fre-quences can be set n band edge screen.

• OFF : Band edge beep OFF• ON (Default) : Band edge beep sounds when an

operatng frequency enters or exts a default amateur band. (default)

• ON (User) : A beep sounds when an operatng frequency enters or exts an ama-teur band that s set n band edge screen. (p. 31)

• ON (User) & TX Lmt : A beep sounds when an operatng

frequency enters or exts an amateur band that s set n band edge screen and TX s lmted out of the band. (p. 31)

Beep Sound 1000HzSets the desred beep frequency wthn 500 to 2000 Hz n 10 Hz steps. (default: 1000 Hz)

RF/SQL Control RF+SQLThe [RF/SQL] control can be set as the RF/squelch control (default), the squelch control only (RF gan s fxed at maxmum) or ‘Auto’ (RF gan control n SSB, CW, RTTY and PSK; squelch control n AM and FM).

See pgs. 2, 33 for detals.

• AUTO : [RF/SQL] control as RF gan control n SSB, CW, RTTY and PSK; squelch control n AM and FM

• SQL : [RF/SQL] control as squelch control• RF+SQL : [RF/SQL] control as RF/squelch control

(default)

Quick Dualwatch ON

When ths tem s set to ON, pushng and holdng [DUALWATCH] for 1 sec. sets the sub readout fre-quency to the man readout frequency, and actvates dualwatch operaton. (default: ON)

• OFF : Quck dualwatch OFF• ON : Quck dualwatch ON


128

10SET MODE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

Others set mode (Contnued)

Quick SPLIT ON

When ths tem s set to ON, pushng and holdng [SPLIT] for 1 sec. sets the unselected VFO’s readout frequency and operatng mode to the selected VFO’s readout, and actvates splt operaton. (default: ON)


• OFF : Quck splt OFF• ON : Quck splt ON

FM SPLIT Offset (HF) –0.100MHz

Sets the offset (dfference between transmt and receve frequences) for the quck splt functon. Ths settng s used for HF bands n FM mode only and s used to nput the repeater offset for an HF band.

The offset frequency can be set from –9.999 to +9.999 MHz n 1 kHz steps. (default: –0.100 MHz)

FM SPLIT Offset (50M) –0.500MHz

Sets the offset (dfference between transmt and receve frequences) for the quck splt functon. Ths settng s used for 50 MHz band FM mode only, and s used to nput the repeater offset for the 50 MHz band.

The offset frequency can be set from –9.999 to +9.999 MHz n 1 kHz steps. (default: –0.500 MHz)

SPLIT LOCK OFF

When ths tem s ON, the man dal can be used to adjust the transmt frequency whle pushng [XFC] even whle the lock functon s actvated. (default: OFF)

See pgs. 88, 89 for splt frequency operaton detals.

• OFF : Splt lock OFF• ON : Splt lock ON

Tuner (Auto Start) OFF

The nternal antenna tuner has an automatc start capablty whch starts tunng f the SWR s hgh. (default: OFF)

• OFF : The tuner remans OFF even when the SWR s hgh.

• ON : Automatc tune starts even when the tuner s turned OFF durng HF bands operaton.

Tuner (PTT Start) OFF

Tunng of the nternal/external antenna tuner can be started automatcally at the moment the [PTT] s pushed after the operatng frequency s changed (more than 1% from last-tuned frequency). (default: OFF)

• OFF : Tunng star ts only when [TUNER] s pushed.

• ON : (Internal antenna tuner) Tunng starts when [PTT] s pushed on a new frequency (more than 1% from last-tuned frequency) f the nternal antenna tuner s ON.

(External antenna tuner) Tunng always starts when [PTT] s pushed on a new frequency (more than 1%) regardless of the external antenna tuner ON/OFF.

129

10 SET MODE

Tuner Preset Memory Clear

The preset memory* of the selected antenna can be cleared wth pushng [CLR] (F-5).* The varable capactor settngs are memorzed as

a preset pont for each frequency range (100 kHz steps) after the tuner matches an antenna.

• ANT1 Push [CLR] : The preset memory of the antenna that s connected to [ANT 1] s cleared after push-ng [CLR] (F-5).

• ANT2 Push [CLR] : The preset memory of the antenna that s connected to [ANT 2] s cleared after push-ng [CLR] (F-5).

[ANT] Switch Auto

You can set the antenna connector selecton to automatc, manual or non-selecton (when usng 1 antenna only). (default: Auto)

• OFF : Antenna swtch s not actvated and does not functon. The [ANT1] connector s always selected.

• Manual : Antenna swtch s actvated and selects an antenna manually.

• Auto : Antenna swtch s actvated and the band memory memorzes the selected antenna. See p. 112 for detals.

Transverter Function AutoSelects the transverter operaton condton from Auto and ON. (default: Auto)

• Auto : The transcever turns nto transverter oper-aton condton when 2 to 13.8 V DC s appled to [ACC2] pn 6.

• ON : Turn the transverter operaton ON.

Transverter Offset 16.000MHz (14.100.030.100.0)

Sets the desred offset frequency for the trans-verter operaton wthn 0.000 to 99.999 MHz n 1 kHz steps. (default: 16.000 MHz)

RTTY Mark Frequency 2125

Selects the RTTY mark frequency. RTTY mark frequency s swtched between 1275, 1615 and 2125 Hz. (default: 2125 Hz)

2125 Hz s automatcally selected when the nternal RTTY decoder s used.

RTTY Shift Width 170

Selects the RTTY shft wdth. There are 3 selectable values: 170, 200 and 425 Hz. (default: 170 Hz)

170 Hz s automatcally selected when the nternal RTTY decoder s used.


130

10SET MODE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21


RTTY Keying Polarity Normal

Selects the RTTY keyng polarty. Normal or reverse keyng polarty can be selected. (default: Normal)

When reverse polarty s selected, Mark and Space are reversed.

• Normal : Key open/close = Mark/Space• Reverse : Key open/close = Space/Mark

PSK Tone Frequency 1500

Selects the desred PSK tone frequency for the PSK recepton from 1000, 1500 and 2000 Hz. (default: 1500 Hz)

SPEECH Language English

Selects the speech language from Englsh and Japanese. (default: Englsh)

SPEECH Speed HIGH

Selects the speech speed from HIGH (faster) and LOW (slower). (default: HIGH)

SPEECH S-Level ON

The IC-7600 speech processor can announce frequency, mode and sgnal level. Sgnal level announcement can be deactvated f desred.(default: ON)

When “OFF” s selected, the sgnal level s not announced.

• OFF : Sgnal level s not announced. (Operatng frequency and mode s announced.)

• ON : Sgnal level, operatng frequency and mode s announced.

SPEECH [MODE] Switch OFF

Selects the operatng mode speech capablty when a mode swtch s pushed; ON or OFF. (default: OFF)

• OFF : Operatng mode speech capablty OFF• ON : Operatng mode speech capablty ON The selected operatng mode s announced

when a mode swtch s pushed.

[SPEECH/LOCK] Switch SPEECH/LOCK

Selects the [SPEECH/LOCK] swtch acton.(default: SPEECH/LOCK)

• SPEECH/LOCK : (Push) The voce syntheszer functon s actvated.

(Push and hold) The dal lock functon s turned ON or OFF.

• LOCK/SPEECH : (Push) The dal lock functon s turned ON or OFF.

(Push and hold) The voce syn-theszer functon s actvated.

131

10 SET MODE

Memopad Numbers 5

Sets the number of memo pad channels avalable.5 or 10 memo pads can be selected. (default: 5)

MAIN DIAL Auto TS HIGH

Sets the auto tunng step functon for the man dal. When rotatng the man dal rapdly, the tunng step automatcally changes several tmes as selected.

There are 2 type of auto tunng steps: HIGH (Fastest) and LOW (Faster). (default: HIGH)

• HIGH : Approx. 5 tmes faster when the tun-ng step s set to 1 kHz or smaller steps; approx. 2 tmes faster when the tunng step s set to 5 kHz or larger steps.

• LOW : Approx. 2 tmes faster• OFF : Auto tunng step s turned OFF.

MIC Up/Down Speed HIGH

Sets the rate at whch frequences are scanned when the mcrophone [UP]/[DN] swtches are pushed and held. HIGH or LOW can be selected.

• LOW : Low speed (25 tunng steps/sec.)• HIGH : Hgh speed (default; 50 tunng steps/sec.)

Quick RIT/∂TX Clear OFF

Selects the RIT/∂TX frequency clearng nstructon wth [CLEAR]. (default: OFF)

• OFF : Clears the RIT/∂TX frequency when [CLEAR] s pushed and held for 1 sec.

• ON : Clears the RIT/∂TX frequency when [CLEAR] s pushed momentarly.

[NOTCH] Switch (SSB) Auto/Manual

Selects notch functons for SSB mode operaton from Auto, Manual and Auto/Manual.(default: Auto/Manual)

• Auto : Only the auto notch can be used.• Manual : Only the manual notch can be used.• Auto/Manual : Both the auto and manual notch can

be used. (default)

[NOTCH] Switch (AM) Auto/Manual

Selects notch functons for AM mode operaton from Auto, Manual and Auto/Manual.(default: Auto/Manual)

• Auto : Only the auto notch can be used.• Manual : Only the manual notch can be used.• Auto/Manual : Both the auto and manual notch can

be used.

SSB/CW Synchronous Tuning OFF

Selects the dsplayed frequency shft functon from ON and OFF. (default: OFF)

When ths functon s actvated, the audo ptch or tones of the receved sgnal wll reman the same even when the operatng mode s changed between SSB and CW.

The amount of frequency shft may dffer accord-ng to the CW ptch settng.

• OFF : The dsplayed frequency does not shft.• ON : The dsplayed frequency shfts when the

operatng mode s changed between SSB and CW.


132

10SET MODE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21


CW Normal Side LSB

Selects the sdeband used to receve CW n CW normal mode from LSB and USB. (default: LSB)

APF Type SOFT

Select audo filter shape for APF from SOFT and SHARP. (default: SOFT)

• SHARP : Sharp filter shape rejects nterferng sg-nals more aggressvely.

• SOFT : Soft flter shape makes dstngushng nose and sgnals easer. The audo filter wdth s related to the CW ptch settng.

External Keypad (VOICE) OFF

Sets the external keypad for voce message trans-msson capablty ON and OFF. (default: OFF)

See page 18 for the equvalent crcut of an external keypad and connecton.

• OFF : External keypad does not functon.• ON : Pushng one of external keypad swtches,

transmts the desred voce message con-tents durng a phone mode operaton.

External Keypad (KEYER) OFF

Sets the external keypad for keyer memory trans-msson capablty ON and OFF. (default: OFF)



transmts the desred keyer memory con-tents durng CW mode operaton.

External Keypad (RTTY) OFF

Sets the external keypad for RTTY TX memory (RT1 to RT4) transmsson capablty ON and OFF. (default: OFF)



transmts the desred RTTY TX memory contents durng RTTY mode operaton.

External Keypad (PSK) OFF

Sets the external keypad for PSK TX memory (PT1 to PT4) transmsson capablty ON and OFF. (default: OFF)



transmts the desred PSK TX memory con-tents durng PSK mode operaton.

133

10 SET MODE

Keyboard [F1]–[F4] (VOICE) OFF

Sets the voce message transmsson capablty ON and OFF when one of [F1]−[F4] key of the keyboard that s connected to the [USB] (A) connector on the front panel s pushed. (default: OFF)

• OFF : [F1]−[F4] key of the connected keyboard does not functon.

• ON : Pushng one of [F1]−[F4] key of the con-nected keyboard transmts the desred voce message contents durng a phone mode operaton.

Keyboard [F1]–[F4] (KEYER) OFFSets the keyer memory transmsson capablty ON and OFF when one of [F1]−[F4] key of the keyboard that s connected to the [USB] (A) connector on the front panel s pushed. (default: OFF)

• OFF : [F1]−[F4] key of the connected keyboard does not functon.

• ON : Pushng one of [F1]−[F4] key of the con-nected keyboard transmts the desred keyer memory contents durng CW mode opera-ton.

CI–V Baud Rate Auto

Sets the CI-V data transfer rate. 300, 1200, 4800, 9600, 19200 bps and “Auto” are avalable.(default: Auto)

When “Auto” s selected, the baud rate s automat-cally set accordng to the data rate of connected controller.

CI–V Address 7Ah

To dstngush equpment, each CI-V transcever has ts own Icom standard address n hexadecmal code. The IC-7600’s address s 7Ah.

When 2 or more IC-7600’s are connected to an optonal CT-17 ci-v level converter, rotate the man dal to select a dfferent address for each IC-7600; the range s 01h to 7Fh.

CI–V Transceive ON

Transceve operaton s possble wth the IC-7600 connected to other Icom HF transcevers or recevers.(default: ON)

• OFF : Transceve operaton OFF• ON : Transceve operaton ON Changng the frequency, operatng mode,

etc. on the IC-7600 automatcally changes those of connected transcevers (or recev-ers) and vce versa.

USB Serial Function CI-V

Select [USB] connector output data format from CI-V and Decode. (default: CI-V)

• CI-V : Outputs data n CI-V format.• Decode : Outputs decoded contents n ASCII code

format.


134

10SET MODE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21


Decode Baud Rate 9600

Selects data transmsson speed (Baud rate) when “Decode” s selected n “USB Seral Functon”; set-tngs are 300, 1200, 4800, 9600 and 19200 bps. (default: 9600)

Keyboard Type English

Selects the connected keyboard type from Englsh, Japanese, Unted Kngdom, French, French (Canadan), German, Portuguese, Portuguese (Brazlan), Spansh, Spansh (Latn Amercan) and Italan. (default: Englsh)

Keyboard Repeat Delay 250msSets the tme perod for delay from 100 to 1000 msec. n 50 msec. steps. (default: 250 msec.)

When a key of the connected keyboard s pushed and held for the set perod, the character s nput contnuously.

Keyboard Repeat Rate 10.9cpsSets the repeatng rate for the connected keyboard wthn 2.0 to 30.0 cps. (default: 10.9 cps)

*cps=character per second

When a key of the connected keyboard s pushed and held, the character s repeatedly nput wth the set speed.

• Avalable repeatng rate 2.0, 2.1, 2.3, 2.5, 2.7, 3.0, 3.3, 3.7, 4.0, 4.3, 4.6,

5.0, 5.5, 6.0, 6.7, 7.5, 8.0, 8.6, 9.2, 10.0, 10.9, 12.0, 13.3, 15.0, 16.0, 17.1, 18.5, 20.0, 21.8, 24.0, 26.7, 30.0

135

10 SET MODE

USB-Memory set menuD USB-Memory set screen arrangement

F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6

F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6

• USB-Memory set menu

• Setting load screen (p. 137)

• Load option set mode (p. 138)

• Firmware update (p. 164)

• Format menu (p. 143)

• Setting save screen (p. 139)

• Save option set mode (p. 140)

F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4

F-3

F-4

F-2

F-5 F-6

• Unmount USB-Memory (p. 142)

F-5

Push and hold for 1 sec.

Push and holdfor 1 sec.


136

10SET MODE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

137

10 SET MODE

File loading

F-1 F-2 F-3 F-5

F-4 F-6

EXIT/SET Main dial

USBLOAD/OPT

LOAD OK

By loadng the saved settng fle from the USB-Memory, you can easly set up another IC-7600 or apply the several operators settngs to one IC-7600.

q Durng set mode menu screen ndcaton, push [USB] (F-6) to select USB set menu screen.

w Push [LOAD] (F-1) to select settng load screen.e Push and hold [LOAD/OPT] (F-4) for 1 sec. to

select load opton set mode, then rotate the man dal to set the desred loadng condtons, f desred.

• See page 138 for detals.r Push [EXIT/SET] to set.t Push [Y] (F-2) or [Z] (F-3) to select the desred

settng fle.y Push [LOAD/OPT] (F-4). • Confrmaton screen appears.u Push [OK] (F-5) to starts loadng. • After the loadng s completed, the message dalog,

“Reboot the IC-7600,” appears.i Turn the transcever power OFF then ON to make

the settng effectve.

D Load option set mode

LOAD Contents Select

Selects file load condton from All and Select.(default: Select)

• All : Loads and sets the all followng contents. • Select : Loads and sets the selected contents only.

ANT Memory NO

Selects the antenna memory settng loadng cond-ton from YES and NO. (default: NO)

• YES : Loads and sets the antenna memory.• NO : Use the orgnal antenna memory settng.

REF Adjust NOSelects the reference sgnal settng load condton from YES and NO. (default: NO)

• YES : Loads and sets the reference sgnal settng.• NO : Use the orgnal reference sgnal settng.

CI–V Address NO

Selects the CI-V address settng load condton from YES and NO. (default: NO).

• YES : Loads and sets the CI-V address settng.• NO : Use the orgnal CI-V address settng.

Other Memory & Settings YES

Ths settng s fixed “YES.” • YES : Loads and sets memory channel contents and other settngs.

Voice TX Memory YES

Selects the voce TX message load condton from YES and NO. (default: YES)

• YES : Loads and sets voce TX message.• NO : Use the orgnal voce TX message.

Voice RX Memory NO

Selects the voce RX message load condton from YES and NO. (default: NO)

• YES : Loads and sets voce RX message.• NO : Use the orgnal voce RX message.

138

10SET MODE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

File saving

F-1 F-2 F-4F-3

DEL SPACE

F-1 F-2 F-4

F-6

EXIT/SET Main dial

USB

SAVE EDIT

Symbol ABC

123

DIR/FILE

F-1 F-2 F-4 F-5

DEF SAVE/OPT

F-2 F-4F-3REN DELMAKE F-5

OK

Memory channel contents, set mode settngs, etc. can be saved nto the USB-Memory for backup.

q Durng set mode menu screen ndcaton, push [USB] (F-6) to select USB-Memory set menu screen.

w Push [SAVE] (F-2) to select settng save screen.e Change the followng condtons f desred. • File name: z Push [EDIT] (F-4) to select fle name edt con-




• [ABC] (MF6): A to Z (captal letters); [123] (MF7): 0 to 9 (numerals); [Symbol] (MF7): ! # $ % & ’ ` ^ – ( ) _ – @ can be selected.


c Push [EXIT/SET] to set the fle name. • Save option z Push and hold [SAVE/OPT] (F-5) for 1 sec. to

enter save opton set mode. x Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the tem,

then rotate the man dal to select the desred settng. (see p. 140 for detals)


c Push [EXIT/SET] to return to the prevous ndcaton.

• Saving location z Push [DIR/FILE] (F-1) to select tree vew screen. x Select the desred drectory or folder n the







r Push [SAVE/OPT] (F-5). • Confrmaton screen appears.t Push [OK] (F-5) to save. • After savng s completed, return to USB-Memory set

menu automatcally.


139

10 SET MODE

140

10SET MODE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

D Save option set mode

SAVE Contents All

Selects file save condton from All and Select.(default: All)

• All : Saves all the followng contents. • Select : Saves the selected contents only.

Memory & Settings YES

Ths settng s fixed “YES.” • YES : Saves memory channel contents and set-tngs of set modes.

Voice TX Memory YES

Selects the voce TX message save condton from YES and NO. (default: YES)

• YES : Saves the voce TX message.• NO : Does not save.

Voice RX Memory NO

Selects the voce RX message save condton from YES and NO. (default: NO)

• YES : Saves the voce RX message.• NO : Does not save.

Changing a file name

Keypad

F-1 F-2 F-3 EXIT/SET Main dialDIR/FILE

RENSymbol ABC

123

When a PC keyboard s connected to [USB] con-nector on the front panel, the file name can also be edted from the keyboard. In ths case, a USB hub s requred.

The fle name, saved n the USB-Memory, can be re-named from the transcever as desred.

q Durng settng save screen ndcaton, push [DIR/FILE] (F-1) to select tree vew screen.

• Push [Y] (F-2) or [Z] (F-3) to select the desred folder. • “DECODE,” “SETTING” and “VOICE” folders are aval-

able as the default. • After the folder s selected, push and hold [Ω ≈] (F-4)

for 1 sec. to dsplay content folder(s), f avalable.w Push [DIR/FILE] (F-1) to select fle lst screen.e Push [Y] (F-2) or [Z] (F-3) to select the desred

fle.r Push [REN] (MF5) momentarly to select the fle

name edt condton.t Push [ABC] (MF6) or [123]/[Symbol] (MF7) to

select the character group, then rotate the man dal to select the character.

• [ABC] (MF6): A to Z (captal letters); [123] (MF7): 0 to 9 (numerals); [Symbol] (MF7): ! # $ % & ’ ` ^ – ( ) _ – @ can be selected.


• Pushng the transcever’s keypad, [0]–[9] and [.] can also enter numerals.

y Push [EXIT/SET] to set the fle name.

141

10 SET MODE

Deleting a file

F-1 F-2 F-3 F-5

DIR/FILE

DEL

OK

Unmounting USB-Memory

F-5

OK

UNMOUNT

RECOMMENDATION! Deletng the settng fle s rreversble. Confrm the contents before deletng a settng fle!

q Durng settng save screen ndcaton, push [DIR/FILE] (F-1) to select tree vew screen.

• Push [Y] (F-2) or [Z] (F-3) to select the desred folder. • “DECODE,” “SETTING” and “VOICE” folders are aval-

able as the default. • After the folder s selected, push and hold [Ω ≈] (F-4)

for 1 sec. to dsplay content folder(s), f avalable.w Push [DIR/FILE] (F-1) to select fle lst screen.e Push [Y] (F-2) or [Z] (F-3) to select the desred

fle to be deleted.r Push and hold [DEL] (MF6) for 1 sec. • Confrmaton screen appears.t Push [OK] (F-5) to delete. • After the deletng, return to settng save screen auto-

matcally.

CAUTION: When removng the USB-Memory, unmount operaton s recommended. If you do not unmount the memory n ths case, data n the USB-memory may be corrupted.

q Durng USB-Memory set menu screen ndcaton, push and hold [UNMOUNT] (F-5) for 1 sec.

• Confrmaton screen appears.w Push [OK] (F-5) to unmount the USB-Memory.e After the ndcator above [USB] (A) connector goes

off, remove the USB-Memory.

142

10SET MODE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

Formatting the USB-Memory

F-6F-4

FORMAT FAT32

F-5

OKFAT /

CANCEL/

Saved data n the USB-Memory can be erased.

IMPORTANT! Formattng erases all saved data n the USB-Memory. Makng a backup fle on your PC s recommended.

q Durng USB-Memory set menu screen ndcaton, push and hold [FORMAT] (F-4) for 1 sec.

• Confrmaton screen appears.w Push [FAT] (F-5) or [FAT32] (F-6) to select the for-

mat type, FAT or FAT32, respectvely. • Confrmaton screen appears.e Push [OK] (F-5) to format. • Push [CANCEL] (F-6) to cancel.r Returns to USB-Memory set menu ndcaton auto-

matcally.

NOTE: If no USB-Memory s nserted and [FORMAT] (F-4) s selected as n step q, an error message appears as below.

143

10 SET MODE

D Transceiver powerPROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF.

Power does not come on when the [POWER] swtch s pushed.

• Power cable s mproperly connected.• Fuse s blown.

• Re-connect the DC power cable correctly.• Check for the cause, then replace the fuse

wth the spare one. ( Fuses are nstalled n the DC power cable

and the nternal PA unt.)

p. 20p. 149

D Transmit and receivePROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF.

No sounds from the speaker. • Volume level s too low.

• The squelch s closed.

• The transcever s n transmt.

• Rotate the [AF] control clockwse to obtan a sutable lstenng level.

• Rotate the [RF/SQL] control to 11 o’clock poston to open the squelch.

• Push [TRANSMIT] to receve or check the SEND lne of an external unt, f connected.

p. 34

p. 33

p. 36

Senstvty s too low, and only strong sgnals are audble.

• The antenna s not connected properly.• The antenna for another band s selected.

• The antenna s not properly tuned.

• The attenuator s actvated.

• Re-connect to the antenna connector.• Select an antenna sutable for the operatng

frequency.• Push and hold [TUNER] for 1 sec. to manually

tune the antenna.• Push [ATT] (MF4) several tmes to select

“ATT OFF.”

—p. 112

p. 113

p. 72

Receved audo s unclear or dstorted.

• Wrong operatng mode s selected.• PBT functon s actvated.

• Nose blanker s turned ON when recevng a strong sgnal.

• Preamp s actvated.

• The nose reducton s actvated and the [NR] control s too far clockwse.

• Select a sutable operatng mode.• Push and hold [PBT-CLR] for 1 sec. to reset

the functon.• Push [NB] to turn the nose blanker OFF.

• Push [P.AMP] (MF3) once or twce to turn the functon OFF.

• Set the [NR] control for maxmum readablty.

p. 32p. 75

p. 81

p. 72

p. 82

The [ANT] swtch does not functon

• The antenna swtch has not been actvated. • Set the antenna swtch n set mode to “Auto” or “Manual.”

p. 130

Transmttng s mpossble. • The operatng frequency s not nsde a ham band.

• Set the frequency to be n a ham band. p. 28

Output power s too low. • The [RF POWER] control s set too far coun-terclockwse

• The drve gan level s set too hgh.• The [MIC GAIN] control s set too far counter-

clockwse• The antenna for another band s selected.

• The antenna s not properly tuned.

• Rotate the [RF POWER] control clockwse.

• Set the drve gan level to a sutable level.• Set the [MIC GAIN] control to a sutable pos-

ton.• Select an antenna sutable for the operatng

frequency.• Push and hold [TUNER] for 1 sec. to manually

tune the antenna.

p. 36

p. 37p. 36

p. 112

p. 113

No contact can be made wth another staton.

• RIT or ∂TX functon s actvated.

• Splt frequency functon and/or dualwatch are/s actvated.

• Push [RIT] or [∂TX] to turn the functon OFF.

• Push [SPLIT] and/or [DUALWATCH] to turn the functon OFF.

pgs. 73, 87pgs. 79, 88

Transmt sgnal s unclear or dstorted.

• The [MIC GAIN] control s set too far clock-wse.

• The speech compressor functon s actvated.

• Set the [MIC GAIN] control to a sutable pos-ton.

• Push [COMP] (MF7) to turn the functon OFF.

p. 37

p. 86

Repeater cannot be accessed. • Splt frequency functon s not actvated.• Programmed subaudble tone frequency s

wrong.

• Push [SPLIT] to to turn the functon ON• Reset the frequency usng set mode.

p. 88p. 28

TroubleshootingThe followng chart s desgned to help you correct problems whch are not equpment malfunctons.

If you are unable to locate the cause of a problem or solve t through the use of ths chart, contact your nearest Icom Dealer or Servce Center.

11

144

MAINTENANCE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

145

11 MAINTENANCE

Main dial brake adjustment The tenson of the man dal may be adjusted to sut your preference.The brake adjustment s located on the bottom sde of the front panel. See the fgure at rght.Slde the brake adjustment to a comfortable tenson level whle turnng the dal contnuously and evenly n one drecton.

Main dial

Brakeadjustment

Light

Heavy

D ScanningPROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF.

Programmed scan does not stop.

• Squelch s open. • Set the [RF/SQL] control to the threshold pont.

p. 33

Programmed scan does not start.

• The same frequences have been programmed n scan edge memory channels P1 and P2.

• Program dfferent frequences n scan edge memory channel P1 and P2.

p. 101

Memory scan does not start. • 2 or more memory channels have not been programmed.

• Program more than 2 memory channels. p. 101

Select memory scan does not start.

• 2 or more memory channels have not been desgnated as select channels.

• Desgnate more than 2 memory channels as select channels for the scan.

p. 110

D DisplayPROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF.

The dsplayed frequency does not change properly.

• The dal lock functon s actvated.

• A set mode screen s selected.

• The nternal CPU has malfunctoned.

• Push and hold [SPEECH/LOCK] for 1 sec. to turn the functon OFF.

• Push [EXIT/SET] several tmes to ext the set mode screen.

• Reset the CPU.

p. 82

p. 118

p. 149

The dsplay ndcates the IC-7600 screen wth “bound,” “rotaton” or “twst” condton.

• The screen saver functon s actvated. • Operate the transcever.• Set the screen saver functon n set mode to

“OFF.”

—p. 127

D Format USB-MemoryPROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF.

Format error appears when formattng n FAT32

• The nserted USB-Memory capacty s smaller than 64 MB.

• Insert a USB-Memory larger than 64 MB or select the FAT format.

p. 143

Format error appears when formattng n FAT

• The nserted USB-Memory capacty s larger than 2 GB.

• Insert a USB-Memory smaller than 2 GB or select the FAT32 format.

p. 143

SWR readingThe SWR meter ndcates the SWR over the trans-msson lne n all modes.

q Push [TUNER] to turn the antenna tuner OFF.w Push and hold [METER] (MF2) for 1 sec. to dsplay

mult-functon meter.e Push [RTTY/PSK] once or twce to select RTTY

mode.r Push [TRANSMIT].t Rotate [RF POWER] clockwse past the 12 o’clock

poston for more than 30 W output power.y Read the SWR on the SWR meter gage.u Push [EXIT/SET] to close mult-functon meter.

The bult-n antenna tuner matches the transmtter to the antenna when the SWR s lower than 3 : 1.

[RF POWER]

METERTRANSMIT TUNER

RTTY/PSK EXIT/SET

Screen type and font selections2 types of screen mages and 3 types of frequency readout ndcaton fonts are avalable n the IC-7600.


w Push [SET] (F-6) to select set mode menu screen.e Push [DISP] (F-3) to enter dsplay set mode.r Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select “Dsplay

Type” tem when selectng the screen mage, select “Dsplay Font” when selectng the frequency read-out ndcaton font.

t Rotate the man dal to select the desred screen mage or font.

• Screen mage s selectable from A (Black back) and B (Blue back).

• Basc, Italc and Round are avalable for the frequency readout font.

y Push [EXIT/SET] twce to ext from dsplay set mode.

F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4

F-6

DISP

EXIT/SET Main dial

SET

DEF

• Screen image example— Display Type: B, Display Font: Italic

Better than 1.5:1

146

11MAINTENANCE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

Frequency calibration (approximate)A very accurate frequency counter s requred to cal-brate the frequency of the transcever. However, a rough check may be performed by recevng rado staton WWV, WWVH, or other standard frequency sgnals.

CAUTION: The IC-7600 has been thoroughly adjusted and tested at the factory before beng shpped. You should not have to re-calbrate t.

q Push [SSB] to select USB mode.w Push and hold [PBT-CLR] for 1 sec. to clear the

PBT settng and make sure that the RIT/∂TX func-ton s not actvated.

e Set the frequency to the standard frequency staton mnus 1 kHz.

• When recevng WWV or WWVH (at 15.00000 MHz) as a standard frequency, set the operatng frequency for 14.99900 MHz.

• Other standard frequences can be used.r Push [EXIT/SET] several tmes to close a mult-

functon screen, f necessary.t Push [SET] (F-6) to select set mode menu screen.y Push [OTHERS] (F-5) to enter others set mode.u Push [Y ] (F-1) several tmes to select the

“Calbraton Marker” tem.i Rotate the man dal clockwse to turn the calbra-

ton marker ON.o Push [EXIT/SET] once to return to set mode menu

screen.!0 Push [ACC] (F-2) to enter accessory set mode.!1 Push [Z] (F-2) several tmes to select the “REF

Adjust” tem.!2 Rotate the man dal to adjust for a zero beat wth

the receved standard sgnal as shown at rght. • Zero beat means that two sgnals are exactly the same

frequency, resultng n a sngle tone beng emtted.!3 Turn the calbraton marker OFF n others set

mode.!4 Push [EXIT/SET] twce to ext set mode.

F-1 F-2

F-6

EXIT/SET Main dial

SET

F-5

OTHERS

ACC

SSB

PBT-CLR

/

• Calibration marker item

• REF Adjust item

147

11 MAINTENANCE

Opening the transceiver’s caseFollow the case openng procedures shown here when you want to replace the clock backup battery or nternal fuse.

CAUTION: Turn the power OFF and dsconnect the DC power cable from the transcever before performng any work on the transcever. Otherwse, there s danger of electrc shock and/or equpment damage.

q Remove the two screws from the carryng handle-and remove the handle from the transcever.

w Remove the 6 screws from the top of the trans-cever and the 4 screws from the sdes, then lft up the top cover.

e Turn the transcever upsde-down.

CAUTION: NEVER HOLD THE MAIN DIAL OR ANY OTHER KNOBS when the transcever s beng turned upsde down. Ths may damage the transcever.

r Remove 6 screws from the bottom, then lft up the bottom cover.

About the leg padsTo detach the leg pads from the rght sde panel of the top/bottom cover, push them from the nner sde of each cover after steps q to r as above.

Carrying handle

Top cover

Bottom cover

PA shieldingplate

Clock backup battery replacementThe IC-7600 has a lthum backup battery (CR2032) nsde for clock and tmer functons. The usual lfe of the backup battery s approxmately 2 years.When the backup battery s dscharged, the trans-cever transmts and receves normally but cannot retan the current tme.

CAUTION: Turn the power OFF and dsconnect the DC power cable from the transcever before removng the transcever’s cover.

q Remove the bottom cover as shown above.w Replace the clock backup battery, located on the

front panel as llustrated at rght. • Make sure the battery polarty s correct.e Return the bottom cover to the orgnal poston.r Set the date and tme n tme set mode. (p. 116)

148

11MAINTENANCE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

Fuse replacementIf a fuse blows or the transcever stops functonng, try to fnd the source of the problem, and replace the damaged fuse wth a new, adequately rated fuse.

CAUTION: Turn the power OFF and dsconnect the DC power cable from the transcever before removng the transcever’s cover.

D DC power cable fuse replacementRefer the fgure llustrated at rght for the DC power cable fuse replacement.

D Circuitry fuse replacementThe 13.8 V DC from the DC power cable s appled to all unts n the IC-7600, except for the power ampl-fer, through the crcutry fuse. Ths fuse s nstalled n the PA unt.

q Remove the top cover. (p. 148)w Remove the 11 screws, then remove the bottom

cover and the PA sheldng plate as shown at rght.e Replace the crcutry fuse as shown n the dagram

as at rght.r Replace the PA sheldng plate, top cover and

screws to ther orgnal poston.

R WARNING: DO NOT pull the speaker cable when removng or replacng the PA sheldng plate. Otherwse, a fre, njury or damage the transcever may occur.

Resetting the CPUq Turn the transcever power OFF n advance.w Whle pushng and holdng [F-INP ENT] and [MW],

push [POWER] to turn power ON. • The nternal CPU s reset. • The CPU start-up takes approx. 5 sec. • The transcever dsplays ts ntal VFO frequences

when resettng s complete.e Correct the set mode settngs after resettng, f

desred.

NOTE: Resettng CLEARS all programmed con-tents n memory channels and returns programmed values n set mode to default values.

The IC-7600 has two fuse types as below nstalled for transcever protecton.• DC power cable fuses .............................. ATC 30 A • Crcutry fuse .............................................. ATC 5 A

ATC 30 A fuse

PA shielding plate

ATC 5 A fuse

Speaker cable

POWER F-INP ENT MW

149

11 MAINTENANCE

About protection indicationsThe IC-7600 has a 2-step protecton functon to pro-tect the fnal power amplfers.The protector montors the power amplfer temper-ature and actvates when the temperature becomes extremely hgh.

• Power down transmission Reduces the transmt output power to 50 W. “LMT” appears besde the TX ndcator (p. 14) dur-

ng transmt.• Transmission inhibit Deactvates the transmtter. The TX ndcator (p. 14) s dsplayed n gray durng

transmt.

When the protector s actvated, wat untl the power amplfer cools down usng the transcever n stand-by or receve condton.

NOTE: DO NOT turn the transcever power OFF when the protector s ON. If you do, the coolng fan wll not functon and t wll take longer to cool the transcever.

The power amplfer temperature can be montored n the mult-functon meter, TEMP gauge.

Screen saver functionThe IC-7600 has a screen saver functon to protect the LCD from the “burn-n” effect.


w Push [SET] (F-6) to select set mode menu screen.e Push [DISP] (F-3) to enter dsplay set mode.r Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) several tmes to select

the “Screen Saver Functon” tem.t Rotate the man dal to select the desred tme

perod for the screen saver actvaton from 15, 30, 60 mn. and OFF.

• Deactvate the screen saver wth “OFF” selecton.y Push [Z] (F-2) to select the “Screen Saver Type”

tem.u Rotate the man dal to select the screen saver type

from “Bound,” “Rotaton” and “Twst.” • Push and hold [PREVIEW] (F-5) to dsplay the ndca-

ton for your reference.i Push [EXIT/SET] twce to ext set mode.

Check the temperature

F-1 F-2 F-3

F-6

DISP

EXIT/SET Main dial

SET

F-5

PREVIEW

When “Twst” s selected

150

11MAINTENANCE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

Remote jack (CI-V) information

Controller to IC-7600

FE FE 7A E0 Cn Sc Data area FD

Pre

ambl

eco

de (f

ixed

)

Tran

scei

ver’s

defa

ult a

ddre

ss

Con

trol

ler’s

defa

ult a

ddre

ss

Com

man

d nu

mbe

r(s

ee th

e co

mm

and

tabl

e)

Sub

com

man

d nu

mbe

r(s

ee c

omm

and

tabl

e)

BC

D c

ode

data

suc

h as

for

freq

uenc

y, m

emor

ynu

mbe

r en

try

(see

dat

a co

nten

t des

crip

tion)

End

of m

essa

geco

de (f

ixed

)

OK message to controller

FE FE E0 7A FB FD

FE FE E0 7A FA FD

Pre

ambl

eco

de (f

ixed

)

Con

trol

ler’s

defa

ult a

ddre

ss

Tran

scei

ver’s

defa

ult a

ddre

ss

OK

cod

e(f

ixed

)

End

of m

essa

geco

de (f

ixed

)

NG message to controller

NG

cod

e(f

ixed

)

IC-7600 to controller

q w e r t y u

FE FE E0 7A Cn Sc Data area FD

q w e r t y u

12

151

CONTROL COMMAND

D CI-V connection example The transcever can be connected an optonal CT-17 ci-v level converter to a PC equpped wth an RS-232C port. The Icom Communcatons Interface-V (CI-V) controls the transcever.Up to 4 Icom CI-V transcevers or recevers can be connected to a PC equpped wth an RS-232C port. See p. 134 for settng the CI-V condton usng set mode.

D Data formatThe CI-V system can be operated usng the follow-ng data formats. Data formats dffer accordng to command numbers. A data area or sub command s added for some commands.

9−15V DC

PC

ct-17

mini-plug cableIC-7600

RS-232Ccable

When the transcever s connected to a PC wth the USB cable (thrd party), the optonal CT-17 s not requred.

D Command table

Cmd. Sub cmd. Data Description00 see p. 157 Send frequency data (transceve)01 see p. 157 Operatng mode selecton for transceve02 see p. 159 Read band edge frequences03 see p. 157 Read operatng frequency04 see p. 157 Read operatng mode05 see p. 157 Set operatng frequency06 see p. 157 Operatng mode selecton for transceve07 Select VFO mode

B0 Exchange man and sub bandsB1 Equalze man and sub bandsC0 Turn the dualwatch OFFC1 Turn the dualwatch OND0 Select man bandD1 Select sub band

08 Select memory mode0001 to 0099

Select memory channel (0001=M-CH01, 0099=M-CH99)

0100 Select program scan edge channel P10101 Select program scan edge channel P2

09 Memory wrte0A Memory to VFO0B Memory clear0E 00 Scan stop

01 Programmed/memory scan start02 Programmed scan start03 :F scan start12 Fne programmed scan start13 Fne :F scan start22 Memory scan start23 Select memory scan startA1 Select :F scan span ±5 kHzA2 Select :F scan span ±10 kHzA3 Select :F scan span ±20 kHzA4 Select :F scan span ±50 kHzA5 Select :F scan span ±100 kHzA6 Select :F scan span ±500 kHzA7 Select :F scan span ±1 MHzB0 Set as non-select channelB1 Set as select channel

( The prevously set number by CI-V s set after turnng power ON, or “1” s selected f no selec-ton s performed.)

01 Set as select channel “1”02 Set as select channel “2”03 Set as select channel “3”

B2 00 Set “ALL” for select memory scan01 Set “1” for select memory scan02 Set “2” for select memory scan03 Set “3” for select memory scan

D0 Set scan resume OFFD3 Set scan resume ON

0F 00 Turn the splt functon OFF01 Turn the splt functon ON

Cmd. Sub cmd. Data Description10 00 Select 10 Hz (1 Hz) tunng step

01 Select 100 Hz tunng step02 Select 1 kHz tunng step03 Select 5 kHz tunng step04 Select 9 kHz tunng step05 Select 10 kHz tunng step06 Select 12.5 kHz tunng step07 Select 20 kHz tunng step08 Select 25 kHz tunng step

11 00 Send/read attenuator OFF06 Send/read 6 dB attenuator12 Send/read 12 dB attenuator18 Send/read 18 dB attenuator

12 0000 Send/read ANT1 selecton (RX ANT OFF)0001 Send/read ANT1 selecton (RX ANT ON)0100 Send/read ANT2 selecton (RX ANT OFF)0101 Send/read ANT2 selecton (RX ANT ON)

13 00 Announce all data wth voce syntheszer01 Announce frequency and S-meter level wth

voce syntheszer02 Announce receve mode wth voce syntheszer

14 01 0000 to 0255

Send/read [AF] level (0000=max. CCW, 0255=max. CW)

02 0000 to 0255

Send/read [RF] level (0000=max. CCW, 0255=11 o'clock)

03 0000 to 0255

Send/read [SQL] level (0000=11 o'clock, 0255=max. CW)

06 0000 to 0255

Send/read [NR] level (0000=0%, 0255=100%)

07 0000 to 0255

Send/read nner [TWIN PBT] poston (0000=max. CCW, 0128=center, 0255=max. CW)

08 0000 to 0255

Send/read outer [TWIN PBT] poston (0000=max. CCW, 0128=center, 0255=max. CW)

09 0000 to 0255

Send/read CW ptch ( 0000=300 Hz, 0128=600 Hz, 0255=900 Hz; 5 Hz steps)

0A 0000 to 0255

Send/read [RF POWER] level (0000=max. CCW, 0255=max. CW)

0B 0000 to 0255

Send/read [MIC GAIN] level (0000=max. CCW, 0255=max. CW)

0C 0000 to 0255

Send/read [KEY SPEED] level (0000=max. CCW, 0255=max. CW)

0D 0000 to 0255

Send/read [NOTCH] poston (0000=max. CCW, 0128=center, 0255=max. CW)

0E 0000 to 0255

Send/read COMP level(0000=0, 0255=10)

0F 0000 to 0255

Send/read [BK-IN DELAY] poston (0000=max. CCW, 0255=max. CW)

10 0000 to 0255

Send/read [BAL] poston (0000=max. CCW, 0128=center, 0255=max. CW)

12 0000 to 0255

Send/read NB level (0000=0%, 0255=100%)

14 0000 to 0255

Send/read DRIVE gan (0000=0%, 0255=100%)

15 0000 to 0255

Send/read Montor gan (0000=0%, 0255=100%)

16 0000 to 0255

Send/read VOX gan (0000=0%, 0255=100%)

17 0000 to 0255

Send/read Ant VOX gan (0000=0%, 0255=100%)

19 0000 to 0255

Send/read BRIGHT level (0000=0%, 0255=100%)

15 01 00 Read squelch condton (squelch close)01 Read squelch condton (squelch open)

02 0000 to 0255

Read S-meter level (0000=S0, 0120=S9, 0241=S9+60 dB)

11 0000 to 0255

Read RF power meter (0000=0%, 0143=50%, 0213=100%)

12 0000 to 0255

Read SWR meter ( 0000=SWR1.0, 0048=SWR1.5, 0080=SWR2.0)

13 0000 to 0255

Read ALC meter (0000=0, 0120=Max.)

14 0000 to 0255

Read COMP meter (0000=0 dB, 0130=15 dB, 0241=30 dB)

152

12CONTROL COMMAND

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

Cmd. Sub cmd. Data Description15 15 0000 to

0255Read VD meter (0152=10 V, 0181=13 V, 0212=16 V)

16 0000 to 0255

Read ID meter (0000=0 A, 0097=10 A, 0241=25 A)

16 02 00 Preamp OFF01 Preamp 1 ON02 Preamp 2 ON

12 00 AGC FAST selecton01 AGC MID selecton02 AGC SLOW selecton

22 00 Nose blanker OFF01 Nose blanker ON

32 00 Audo peak filter OFF01 Audo peak filter WIDE ON

(320 Hz s selected when SHARP APF s set)02 Audo peak filter MID ON

(160 Hz s selected when SHARP APF s set)03 Audo peak filter NAR ON

(80 Hz s selected when SHARP APF s set)40 00 Nose reducton OFF

01 Nose reducton ON41 00 Auto notch functon OFF

01 Auto notch functon ON42 00 Repeater tone OFF

01 Repeater tone ON43 00 Tone squelch OFF

01 Tone squelch ON44 00 Speech compressor OFF

01 Speech compressor ON45 00 Montor functon OFF

01 Montor functon ON46 00 VOX functon OFF

01 VOX functon ON47 00 BK-IN functon OFF

01 Sem BK-IN functon ON02 Full BK-IN functon ON

48 00 Manual notch functon OFF01 Manual notch functon ON

4F 00 Twn peak filter OFF01 Twn peak filter ON

50 00 Dal lock functon OFF01 Dal lock functon ON

19 00 Read the transcever ID1A 00 see p. 159 Send/read memory contents

01 see p. 157 Send/read band stackng regster contents02 see p. 157 Send/read memory keyer contents03 00 to 49 Send/read the selected filter wdth

( SSB, CW, PSK: 00=50 Hz, 40=3600 Hz; RTTY: 00=50 Hz, 31=2700 Hz; AM: 00=200 Hz, 49=10 kHz)

04 00 to 13 Send/read the selected AGC tme constant (00=OFF, 01=0.1/0.3 sec., 13=6.0/8.0 sec.)

05 0001 see p. 120 Send/read SSB RX HPF/LPF0002 00 to 10 Send/read SSB RX Tone (Bass) level

(00=–5, 10=+5)0003 00 to 10 Send/read SSB RX Tone (Treble) level

(00=–5, 10=+5)0004 see p. 120 Send/read AM RX HPF/LPF0005 00 to 10 Send/read AM RX tone (Bass) level

(00=–5, 10=+5)0006 00 to 10 Send/read AM RX Tone (Treble) level

(00=–5, 10=+5)0007 see p. 120 Send/read FM RX HPF/LPF0008 00 to 10 Send/read FM RX tone (Bass) level

(00=–5, 10=+5)0009 00 to 10 Send/read FM RX Tone (Treble) level

(00=–5, 10=+5)0010 see p. 121 Send/read CW RX HPF/LPF0011 see p. 121 Send/read RTTY RX HPF/LPF0012 see p. 121 Send/read PSK RX HPF/LPF0013 00 to 10 Send/read SSB TX Tone (Bass) level

(00=–5, 10=+5)0014 00 to 10 Send/read SSB TX Tone (Treble) level

(00=–5, 10=+5)

Cmd. Sub cmd. Data Description1A 05 0015 00 to 10 Send/read AM TX Tone (Bass) level

(00=–5, 10=+5)0016 00 to 10 Send/read AM TX Tone (Treble) level

(00=–5, 10=+5)0017 00 to 10 Send/read FM TX Tone (Bass) level

(00=–5, 10=+5)0018 00 to 10 Send/read FM TX Tone (Treble) level

(00=–5, 10=+5)0019 see p. 122 Send/read SSB TX bandwdth for WIDE0020 see p. 122 Send/read SSB TX bandwdth for MID.0021 see p. 122 Send/read SSB TX bandwdth for NARROW0022 0000 to

0255Send/read DRIVE gan (0000=0%, 0255=100%)

0023 0000 to 0255

Send/read speech level (0000=0%, 0255=100%)

0024 0000 to 0255

Send/read CW sdetone level (0000=0%, 0255=100%)

0025 00 CW sdetone level lmt OFF01 CW sdetone level lmt ON

0026 0000 to 0255

Send/read beep level(0000=0%, 0255=100%)

0027 00 Beep level lmt OFF01 Beep level lmt ON

0028 00 Squelch mute effect OFF (squelch s fixed open) for audo output from USB-B connector

01 Squelch mute effect ON for audo output from USB-B connector

0029 0000 to 0255

Send/read modulaton level for audo nput to USB-B connector (0000=0%, 0255=100%)

0030 00 [MIC] selecton for MOD nput connector dur-ng DATA OFF

01 [ACC] selecton for MOD nput connector dur-ng DATA OFF

02 Both [MIC] and [ACC] selecton for MOD nput connector durng DATA OFF

03 [USB] selecton for MOD nput connector dur-ng DATA OFF

0031 00 [MIC] selecton for MOD nput connector dur-ng DATA1

01 [ACC] selecton for MOD nput connector dur-ng DATA1

02 Both [MIC] and [ACC] selecton for MOD nput connector durng DATA1

03 [USB] selecton for MOD nput connector dur-ng DATA1









0034 00 Lead selecton for SEND relay type01 MOS-FET selecton for SEND relay type

0035 00 Auto selecton for external meter output01 S (recevng sgnal strength) selecton for ex-

ternal meter output02 Po (RF power) selecton for external meter

selecton03 SWR selecton for external meter output04 ALC selecton for external meter output05 COMP selecton for external meter output06 Vd selecton for external meter output07 Id selecton for external meter output

0036 0000 to 0255

Send/read external meter output level (see p. 125)

D Command table (contnued)

153

12 CONTROL COMMAND

Cmd. Sub cmd. Data Description1A 05 0037 0000 to

0255Send/read reference frequency (0000=0%, 0255=100%)

0038 0000 to 0255

Send/read LCD backlght brghtness level (0000=0% (dark), 0255=100% (brght))

0039 0000 to 0255

Send/read key backlght brghtness level (0000=0% (dark), 0255=100% (brght))

0040 00 Dsplay type A selecton01 Dsplay type B selecton

0041 00 Basc font selecton01 Italc font selecton02 Round font selecton

0042 00 SLOW selecton for meter response01 MID selecton for meter response02 FAST selecton for meter response

0043 00 Standard meter selecton for normal screen ndcaton

01 Edgewse meter selecton for normal screen ndcaton

02 Bar meter selecton for normal screen ndca-ton

0044 00 Edgewse meter selecton for wde screen ndcaton

01 Bar meter selecton for wde screen ndcaton0045 00 Meter peak hold functon for Bar meter OFF

01 Meter peak hold functon for Bar meter ON0046 00 Memory name ndcaton OFF

01 Memory name ndcaton ON0047 00 Audo peak filter wdth pop-up ndcaton OFF

01 Audo peak filter wdth pop-up ndcaton ON0048 00 Manual notch filter wdth pop-up ndcaton OFF

01 Manual notch filter wdth pop-up ndcaton ON0049 00 Screen saver OFF

01 15 mn. selecton for screen saver02 30 mn. selecton for screen saver03 60 mn. selecton for screen saver

0050 00 Bound selecton for screen saver type01 Round selecton for screen saver type02 Twst selecton for screen saver type

0051 00 Openng screen ndcaton OFF01 Openng screen ndcaton ON

0052 see p. 158 Send/read openng screen contents.0053 20000101

to 20991231

Send/read date ( 20000101=1st Jan. 2000, 20991231=31st Dec. 2099)

0054 0000 to 2359

Send/read tme (0000=00:00, 2359=23:59)

0055 00 Clock 2 OFF01 Clock 2 ON

0056 see p. 157 Send/read offset tme for clock 20057 see p. 158 Send/read clock 2 name *Up to 3 characters0058 00 Calbraton marker OFF

01 Calbraton marker ON0059 00 Confirmaton beep OFF

01 Confirmaton beep ON0060 00 Band edge beep OFF

01 Band edge beep ON (Beep sounds wth a default amateur band)

02 Band edge beep wth user settng ON03 Band edge beep wth user settng/TX lmt ON

0061 0050 to 0200

Send/read beep audo frequency (0050=500 Hz, 0200=2000 Hz)

0062 00 Auto selecton for [RF/SQL]01 SQL selecton for [RF/SQL]02 RF+SQL selecton for [RF/SQL]

0063 00 Quck dualwatch OFF01 Quck dualwatch ON

0064 00 Quck splt functon OFF01 Quck splt functon ON

0065 see p. 158 FM splt offset frequency settng for HF0066 see p. 158 FM splt offset frequency settng for 50 MHz0067 00 Splt lock functon OFF

01 Splt lock functon ON0068 00 Tuner auto start OFF

01 Tuner auto start ON

Cmd. Sub cmd. Data Description1A 05 0069 00 PTT tune OFF

01 PTT tune ON0070 00 Antenna selecton OFF

01 Manual antenna selecton02 Auto antenna selecton

0071 00 Transverter functons automatcally01 Transverter functon ON

0072 see p. 158 Transverter offset frequency0073 00 1275 Hz selecton for RTTY mark frequency

01 1615 Hz selecton for RTTY mark frequency02 2125 Hz selecton for RTTY mark frequency

0074 00 170 Hz selecton for RTTY shft wdth01 200 Hz selecton for RTTY shft wdth02 425 Hz selecton for RTTY shft wdth

0075 00 RTTY keyng wth normal polarty01 RTTY keyng wth reverse polarty

0076 00 1000 Hz selecton for PSK tone frequency01 1500 Hz selecton for PSK tone frequency02 2000 Hz selecton for PSK tone frequency

0077 00 Englsh selecton for voce syntheszer speech language

01 Japanese selecton for voce syntheszer speech language

0078 00 Speech speed slow01 Speech speed fast

0079 00 S-meter level announcement OFF01 S-meter announcement ON

0080 00 Operatng mode announcement (after push-ng mode swtch) OFF

01 Operatng mode announcement (after push-ng mode swtch) ON

0081 00 [SPEECH/LOCK] key functon settng ( Push momentarly=SPEECH, Push and hold=LOCK)

01 [SPEECH/LOCK] key functon settng ( Push momentarly=LOCK, Push and hold=SPEECH)

0082 00 Number of memo pad channels 501 Number of memo pad channels 10

0083 00 Auto TS for man dal OFF01 Auto TS for man dal ON wth LOW02 Auto TS for man dal ON wth HIGH

0084 00 LOW selecton for mcrophone Up/Down speed01 HIGH selecton for mcrophone Up/Down speed

0085 00 Quck RIT/:TX clear OFF01 Quck RIT/:TX clear ON

0086 00 Auto notch selecton for SSB operaton01 Manual notch selecton for SSB operaton02 Auto/Manual notch selecton for SSB operaton

0087 00 Auto notch selecton for AM operaton01 Manual notch selecton for AM operaton02 Auto/Manual notch selecton for AM operaton

0088 00 SSB/CW synchronous tunng functon OFF01 SSB/CW synchronous tunng functon ON

0089 00 LSB selecton for CW normal sde set01 USB selecton for CW normal sde set

0090 00 SHARP selecton for APF type01 SOFT selecton for APF type

0091 00 Voce memory transmsson OFF wth exter-nal keypad

01 Voce memory transmsson ON wth external keypad

0092 00 Memory keyer transmsson OFF wth exter-nal keypad

01 Memory keyer transmsson ON wth external keypad

0093 00 RTTY memory transmsson OFF wth exter-nal keypad

01 RTTY memory transmsson ON wth external keypad

0094 00 PSK memory transmsson OFF wth external keypad

01 PSK memory transmsson ON wth external keypad

154

12CONTROL COMMAND

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

D Command table (contnued)

Cmd. Sub cmd. Data Description1A 05 0095 00 Voce memory transmsson OFF wth [F1]–

[F4] on the keyboard01 Voce memory transmsson ON wth [F1]–

[F4] on the keyboard0096 00 Memory keyer transmsson OFF wth [F1]–

[F4] on the keyboard01 Memory keyer transmsson ON wth [F1]–

[F4] on the keyboard0097 00 CI-V transceve OFF

01 CI-V transceve ON0098 00 CI-V selecton for [USB-B] usage

01 Decode selecton for [USB-B] usage0099 00 300 bps selecton for decode speed

01 1200 bps selecton for decode speed02 4800 bps selecton for decode speed03 9600 bps selecton for decode speed04 19200 bps selecton for decode speed

0100 00 Englsh keyboard selecton01 Japanese keyboard selecton02 Unted Kngdom keyboard selecton03 French keyboard selecton04 French (Canadan) keyboard selecton05 German keyboard selecton06 Portuguese keyboard selecton07 Portuguese (Brazlan) keyboard selecton08 Spansh keyboard selecton09 Spansh (Latn Amercan) keyboard selecton10 Italan keyboard selecton

0101 0010 to 0100

Send/read keyboard repeat delay ( 0010=100 msec., 0100=1000 msec.; 50 msec. steps)

0102 00 to 31 Send/read keyboard repeat speed (00=2.0 cps, 31=30.0 cps)

0103 00 Scope ndcaton durng TX OFF01 Scope ndcaton durng TX ON

0104 00 Scope max. hold functon OFF01 Scope max. hold functon ON

0105 00 Flter center selecton for scope center fre-quency (center mode only)

01 Carrer pont center selecton for scope cen-ter frequency (center mode only)

02 Carrer pont center (Abs. Freq.) selecton for scope center frequency (center mode only)

0106 see p. 158 Send/read waveform color for recevng sgnal0107 see p. 158 Send/read waveform color for max. hold0108 00 SLOW selecton for scope sweep speed n

±2.5 kHz span01 MID selecton for scope sweep speed n

±2.5 kHz span02 FAST selecton for scope sweep speed n

±2.5 kHz span0109 00 SLOW selecton for scope sweep speed n

±5 kHz span01 MID selecton for scope sweep speed n

±5 kHz span02 FAST selecton for scope sweep speed n

±5 kHz span0110 00 SLOW selecton for scope sweep speed n









±50 kHz span

Cmd. Sub cmd. Data Description1A 05 0113 00 SLOW selecton for scope sweep speed n






±250 kHz span0115 see p. 158 Scope edge frequences for 0.03 to 1.60 MHz

band0116 see p. 158 Scope edge frequences for 1.60 MHz to

2.00 MHz band0117 see p. 158 Scope edge frequences for 2.00 MHz to










60.00 MHz band0127 00 Auto montor functon OFF durng voce

memory transmsson01 Auto montor functon ON durng voce mem-

ory transmsson0128 03 to 10 Send/read voce memory short play tme

(03=3 sec., 10=10 sec.)0129 05 to 15 Send/read voce memory normal record tme

(05=5 sec., 15=15 sec.)0130 00 Normal selecton for contest number style

01 “190→ANO” selecton for contest number style02 “190→ANT” selecton for contest number style03 “90→NO” selecton for contest number style04 “90→NT” selecton for contest number style

0131 01 M1 selecton for count up trgger channel02 M2 selecton for count up trgger channel03 M3 selecton for count up trgger channel04 M4 selecton for count up trgger channel

0132 0001 to 9999

Send/read present number (0001=1, 9999=9999)

0133 01 to 60 Send/read CW keyer repeat tme (01=1 sec., 60=60 sec.)

0134 28 to 45 Send/read CW keyer dot/dash rato (28=1:1:2.8, 45=1:1:4.5)

0135 00 2 msec. selecton for rse tme of the transmt-ted CW envelope

01 4 msec. selecton for rse tme of the transmt-ted CW envelope



04 10 msec. selecton for rse tme of the trans-mtted CW envelope

0136 00 Normal selecton for paddle polarty01 Reverse selecton for paddle polarty

0137 00 Straght selecton for keyer type01 BUG-KEY selecton for keyer type02 ELEC-KEY selecton for keyer type

0138 00 Mc. up/down keyer functon OFF01 Mc. up/down keyer functon ON155

12 CONTROL COMMAND

Cmd. Sub cmd. Data Description1A 05 0139 00 RTTY decoder FFT scope averagng functon

OFF01 Number 2 selecton for RTTY decoder FFT

scope averagng functon02 Number 3 selecton for RTTY decoder FFT

scope averagng functon03 Number 4 selecton for RTTY decoder FFT

scope averagng functon0140 see p. 158 Set/read FFT scope waveform color set for

RTTY decoder0141 00 RTTY decode USOS functon OFF

01 RTTY decode USOS functon ON0142 00 “CR,LF,CR+LF” selecton for RTTY decode

new lne code01 “CR+LF” selecton for RTTY decode new lne

code0143 00 OFF selecton for RTTY dddle

01 BLANK selecton for RTTY dddle02 LTRS selecton for RTTY dddle

0144 00 RTTY encode USOS functon OFF01 RTTY encode USOS functon ON

0145 00 RTTY auto CR+LF by keyboard’s [F12] OFF01 RTTY auto CR+LF by keyboard’s [F12] ON

0146 00 RTTY tme stamp OFF01 RTTY tme stamp ON

0147 00 Local tme selecton for RTTY tme stamp01 Clock2 selecton for RTTY tme stamp

0148 00 Frequency stamp for RTTY tme stamp OFF01 Frequency stamp for RTTY tme stamp ON

0149 see p. 158 Send/read receved text font color for RTTY decoder

0150 see p. 158 Send/read transmtted text font color (RTTY)0151 see p. 158 Send/read tme stamp text font color (RTTY)0152 see p. 158 Send/read text font color n TX buffer (RTTY)0153 00 PSK decoder FFT scope averagng functon

OFF01 Number 2 selecton for PSK decoder FFT

scope averagng functon02 Number 3 selecton for PSK decoder FFT

scope averagng functon03 Number 4 selecton for PSK decoder FFT

scope averagng functon0154 see p. 158 Set/read FFT scope waveform color set for

PSK decoder0155 00 ±8 Hz selecton for PSK AFC functon tunng

range01 ±15 Hz selecton for PSK AFC functon tun-

ng range0156 00 PSK tme stamp OFF

01 PSK tme stamp ON0157 00 Local tme selecton for PSK tme stamp

01 Clock2 selecton for PSK tme stamp0158 00 Frequency stamp for PSK tme stamp OFF

01 Frequency stamp for PSK tme stamp ON0159 see p. 158 Send/read receved text font color for PSK

decoder0160 see p. 158 Send/read transmtted text font color (PSK)0161 see p. 158 Send/read tme stamp text font color (PSK)0162 see p. 158 Send/read text font color n TX buffer (PSK)0163 00 LOW scan speed selecton

01 HIGH scan speed selecton0164 00 Scan resume OFF

01 Scan resume ON0165 0000 to

0255Send/read VOX gan (0000=0%, 0255=100%)

0166 0000 to 0255

Send/read ANTI-VOX gan (0000=0%, 0255=100%)

0167 00 to 20 Send/read VOX delay tme (00=0.0 sec., 20=2.0 sec.)

0168 00 VOX voce delay functon OFF01 Short selecton for VOX voce delay02 Md selecton for VOX voce delay03 Long selecton for VOX voce delay

Cmd. Sub cmd. Data Description1A 05 0169 0000 to

0255Send/read NB level (0000=0%, 0255=100%)

0170 00 to 09 Send/read NB depth (00=1, 09=10)

0171 0000 to 0255

Send/read NB wdth (0000=1, 0255=100)

0172 0000 to 0255

Send/read MONITOR gan (0000=0%, 0255=100%)

06 see p. 158 Send/read DATA mode wth filter set07 00 WIDE selecton for SSB transmt bandwdth

01 MID selecton for SSB transmt bandwdth02 NAR selecton for SSB transmt bandwdth

08 00 SHARP selecton for DSP filter type01 SOFT selecton for DSP filter type

09 00 3 kHz roofing filter selecton01 6 kHz roofing filter selecton02 15 kHz roofing filter selecton

0A 00 WIDE selecton for manual notch wdth01 MID selecton for manual notch wdth02 NAR selecton for manual notch wdth

1B 00 see p. 159 Send/read repeater tone frequency01 see p. 159 Send/read tone squelch frequency

1C 00 00 Transcever's condton (RX)01 Transcever's condton (TX)

01 00 Antenna tuner OFF (through)01 Antenna tuner ON02 Tunng

1E 00 Read number of avalable TX frequency band01 see p. 159 Read TX band edge frequences02 Read number of user-set TX frequency band03 see p. 159 Send/read user-set TX band edge frequences

156

12CONTROL COMMAND

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

D Data content description• Operating frequencyCommand : 00, 03, 05

q

XX X X X

w e

X

r t

XX 00

10 H

z di

git:

0–9

1 H

z di

git:

0–9

1 kH

z di

git:

0–9

100

Hz

digi

t: 0–

9

100

kHz

digi

t: 0–

9

10 k

Hz

digi

t: 0–

9

10 M

Hz

digi

t: 0–

6

1 M

Hz

digi

t: 0–

9

1000

MH

z di

git:

0 (F

ixed

)

100

MH

z di

git:

0(F

ixed

)• Operating modeCommand : 01, 04, 06

q

XX X X

w

q Operating mode w Filter setting00: LSB 05: FM 01: FIL101: USB 07: CW-R 02: FIL202: AM 08: RTTY-R 03: FIL303: CW 12: PSK04: RTTY 13: PSK-R

Flter settng (w) can be skpped wth command 01 and 06. In that case, “FIL1” s selected wth command 01 and the default filter settng of the operatng mode s selected wth command 06, automatcally.

• Memory keyer contentsCommand : 1A 02

X

q: Channel data01： M102： M203： M304： M4

w–&1: Text data

X X X …… X X

• Character’s code Character ASCII code Description

0–9 30–39 NumeralsA–Z 41–5A Alphabetcal characters

space 20 Word space / 2F Symbol? 3F Symbol, 2C Symbol. 2E Symbol

@ 40 Symbol^ 5E e.g., to send BT, enter ^BT 2A Inserts contest number (can be

used for 1 channel only)

• Band stacking registerCommand : 1A 01

q

XX X X

w

q Frequency band code

Code Freq. band Frequency range (unit: MHz)01 1.8 1.800000– 1.99999902 3.5 3.400000– 4.09999903 7 6.900000– 7.49999904 10 9.900000–10.49999905 14 13.900000–14.49999906 18 17.900000–18.49999907 21 20.900000–21.49999908 24 24.400000–25.09999909 28 28.000000–29.99999910 50 50.000000–54.00000011 GENE Other than above

w Regster code

Code Registered No.01 1 (latest)02 203 3 (oldest)

For example, when readng the oldest contents n the 21 MHz band, the code “0703” s used.

When sendng the contents, the followng code should be added after code w.

e−u i, o !0 !1−!3 !4−!6

X X ... X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX XX X X X

q, w

e–u Operatng frequency settngSee “• Operatng frequency.”

i, o Operatng mode settngSee “• Operatng mode.”

!0 Data mode settng1 byte data (XX)

X X

!0

0: OFF, 1: TONE, 2: TSQL0: OFF, 1: DATA 1, 2: DATA 2, 3: DATA 3

!1–!3 Repeater tone frequency settng

!4–!6 Tone squelch frequency settngSee “• Repeater tone/tone squelch settng.”

• Clock 2 offset time settingCommand : 1A 05 0056

X

Shift direction00: + (plus)01: − (minus)

Offset time0000−2400

X X X XX

157

12 CONTROL COMMAND

• Offset frequency settingCommand : 1A 05 0065, 0066, 0072

1 kH

z di

git:

0–9

100

Hz

digi

t: 0

(fix

ed)

100

kHz

digi

t: 0–

9

10 k

Hz

digi

t: 0–

9

10 M

Hz

digi

t: 0–

9†

1 M

Hz

digi

t: 0–

9

Dire

ctio

n:

00=

+ d

irect

ion

01=

– di

rect

ion

q

0X X X X XX

w e

0

r*

*No need to enter for transverter offset frequency setting.†Transverter offset only; Fix to ‘0’ for split offset setting.

• Codes for memory name, opening message and CLOCK2 name contents

To send or read the desred memory name settngs, the character codes, nstructed codes for memory keyer contents, and follows are used.

• Character’s code— Alphabetical charactersCharacter ASCII code Character ASCII code

a–z 61–7A — —

• Character’s code— Symbols Character ASCII code Character ASCII code

! 21 # 23$ 24 % 25& 26 ¥ 5C? 3F ” 22’ 27 ` 60+ 2B – 2D: 3A ; 3B= 3D < 3C> 3E ( 28) 29 [ 5B] 5D 7B 7D | 7C_ 5F – 7E@ 40

Command Set item/Available characters

1A00Memory nameAll characters are avalable.

1A05 0052Openng messageCaptal letters, numerals, some symbols (− / . @) and space are avalable.

1A05 0057

CLOCK 2 nameCaptal letters, small letters, numerals, some symbols (! # $ % & ¥ ? " ’ ` ^ + – / . , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] ¦ _ – @) and space are avalable.

• Color setting Command : 1A 05 0106, 0107, 0140, 0149, 0150,

0151, 0152, 0154, 0159, 0160, 0161, 0162

q

0 X X X 0 X X X 0 X X X

w e r t y

R (Red)0000–0255

G (Green)0000–0255

B (Blue)0000–0255

• Bandscope edge frequency settingCommand : 1A 05 0115, 0116, 0117, 0118, 0119,

0120, 0121, 0122, 0123, 0124, 0125, 0126

1 kH

z: 0

–9

100

Hz:

0 (

fixed

)

100

kHz:

0–9

10 k

Hz:

0–9

10 M

Hz:

0–6

1 M

Hz:

0–9

1 kH

z: 0

–9

100

Hz:

0 (

fixed

)

100

kHz:

0–9

10 k

Hz:

0–9

10 M

Hz:

0–6

1 M

Hz:

0–9

q

X X X X X X X X X X X X

w e r t y

Lower edge Higher edge

• Data mode with filter width settingCommand : 1A 06

q

X X X X

w

00=Data mode OFF01=FIL102=FIL203=FIL3

00=Data mode OFF01=Data mode 1 (D1)02=Data mode 2 (D2)03=Data mode 3 (D3)

158

12CONTROL COMMAND

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

D Data content descrpton (contnued)

• Repeater tone/tone squelch frequency setting

Command : 1B 00, 1B 0110

0Hz

digi

t: 0–

2

10 H

z di

git:

0–9

1 H

z di

git:

0–9

0.1

Hz

digi

t: 0–

9

Fix

ed d

igit:

0*

Fix

ed d

igit:

0*

q*

00 X X X

w e

X

*Not necessary when setting a frequency.

• Band edge frequency settingCommand 02*, 1E 01, 1E 03

q

X X X

w e r t y u i o !0 !1 !2

X X X X X X X X X 2 D X X X X X X X X X X

10 H

z di

git:

0–9

1 H

z di

git:

0–9

1 kH

z di

git:

0–9

100

Hz

digi

t: 0–

910

0 kH

z di

git:

0–9

10 k

Hz

digi

t: 0–

910

MH

z di

git:

0–6

1 M

Hz

digi

t: 0–

910

00 M

Hz

digi

t: 0

(fix

ed)

100

MH

z di

git:

0 (f

ixed

)

10 H

z di

git:

0–9

1 H

z di

git:

0–9

1 kH

z di

git:

0–9

100

Hz

digi

t: 0–

910

0 kH

z di

git:

0–9

10 k

Hz

digi

t: 0–

910

MH

z di

git:

0–6

1 M

Hz

digi

t: 0–

910

00 M

Hz

digi

t: 0

(fix

ed)

100

MH

z di

git:

0 (f

ixed

)

Sep

arat

or (

fixed

)

Lower edge Higher edge

Edg

e nu

mbe

r*: 0

1–30

* Edge number settng s not necessary wth com-mand 02.

q, w Memory channel number0000–0099 : Memory channel 0 to 990100 : Programmed scan edge P10101 : Programmed scan edge P2

e Select memory setting00 : OFF01 : 102 : 203 : 3

r–i Operating frequency settingSee “• Operatng frequency.”

o, !0 Operating mode settingSee “• Operatng mode.”

!1 Data mode setting1 byte data (XX)

X X

!1

0: OFF, 1: TONE, 2: TSQL0: OFF, 1: DATA 1, 2: DATA 2, 3: DATA 3

!2–!4 Repeater tone frequency setting!5–!7 Tone squelch frequency settingSee “• Repeater tone/tone squelch settng.”

!8–@7 Memory name settingUp to 10 characters.See “• Codes for memory name, openng message and Clock 2 name contents.”

159

12 CONTROL COMMAND

• Memory content settingCommand : 1A 00

X

e r−i o, !0 !1 !2−!4 !5−!7

X X X ... ...X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX XX X X X X X X X

q, w !8−@7

General• Frequency coverage : (unt: MHz) Receve 0.030–60.000*1*2

Transmt 1.800–1.999*2, 3.500–3.999*2, 5.33050*3, 5.34650*3, 5.36650*3, 5.37150*3, 5.40350*3, 7.000–7.300*2, 10.100–10.150*2, 14.000–14.350*2, 18.068–18.168*2, 21.000–21.450*2, 24.890–24.990*2, 28.000–29.700*2, 50.000–54.000*2

*1Some frequency bands are not guaranteed. *2Dependng on verson. *3USA verson only.• Mode : USB, LSB, CW, RTTY, PSK,

AM, FM• No. of memory channels : 101 (99 regular, 2 scan edges)• Antenna connector type : SO-239 × 2 and phono jack

(RCA; 50 ø mpedance)• Temperature range : 0˚C to +50˚C (+32˚F to +122˚F)• Frequency stablty : Less than ±0.5 ppm 5 mn. after

power ON. (0˚C to +50˚C; +32˚F to +122˚F)

• Frequency resoluton : 1 Hz• Power supply : 13.8 V DC ±15% (negatve ground)• Power consumpton Transmt : Max. power 23 A Receve : Standby 3.0 A

Max. audo 3.5 A• Dmensons : 340(W) × 116(H) × 279.3(D) mm (projectons not ncluded) 133⁄8(W) × 49⁄16(H) × 11(D) n• Weght (approx.) : 10.0 kg; 22 lb• ACC 1 connector : 8-pn DIN connector• ACC 2 connector : 7-pn DIN connector• CI-V connector : 2-conductor 3.5 (d) mm (1⁄8″)• Dsplay : 5.8-nch (dagonal)

TFT color LCD

Transmitter• Output power (contnuously adjustable) SSB/CW/RTTY/FM : Less than 2 to 100 W AM : Less than 1 to 30 W• Modulaton system SSB : Dgtal PSN modulaton AM : Dgtal Low power modulaton FM : Dgtal Phase modulaton• Spurous emsson HF bands : Less than –50 dB 50 MHz band : Less than –63 dB• Carrer suppresson : More than 40 dB• Unwanted sdeband : More than 55 dB

suppresson • ∂TX varable range : ±9.999 kHz• Mcrophone connector : 8-pn connector (600 ø)• ELEC-KEY connector : 3-conductor 6.35(d) mm (1⁄4″)• KEY connector : 3-conductor 6.35(d) mm (1⁄4″)• SEND connector : Phono jack (RCA)• ALC connector : Phono jack (RCA)

Receiver• Receve system : Double superheterodyne

system• Intermedate frequences 1st : 64.455 MHz

2nd : 36 kHz• Senstvty (typcal) SSB, CW, RTTY : 0.15 µV (1.80–29.99 MHz)*1

(10 dB S/N) BW=2.4 kHz 0.12 µV (50.0–54.0 MHz)*2

AM (10 dB S/N) : 6.3 µV (0.1–1.799 MHz)*1

BW=6 kHz 2 µV (1.80–29.99 MHz)*1 1.6 µV (50.0–54.0 MHz)*2

FM (12 dB SINAD) : 0.5 µV (28.0–29.99 MHz)*1

BW=15 kHz 0.3 µV (50.0–54.0 MHz)*2

*1Pre-amp 1 s ON. *2Pre-amp 2 s ON.• Squelch senstvty (Pre-amp: ON) SSB : Less than 3.2 µV FM : Less than 0.3 µV• Selectvty (IF filter shape s set to SHARP.) SSB (BW: 2.4 kHz) : More than 2.4 kHz/–6 dB

Less than 3.8 kHz/–60 dB CW (BW: 500 Hz) : More than 500 Hz/–6 dB

Less than 900 Hz/–60 dB RTTY (BW: 350 Hz) : More than 350 Hz/–6 dB

Less than 650 Hz/–60 dB AM (BW: 6 kHz) : More than 6.0 kHz/–6 dB

Less than 15.0 kHz/–60 dB FM (BW: 15 kHz) : More than 12.0 kHz/–6 dB

Less than 20.0 kHz/–60 dB• Spurous and mage : More than 70 dB

rejecton rato (except IF through on 50 MHz band)• AF output power : More than 2.0 W at 10% (at 13.8 V DC) dstorton wth an 8 ø load• RIT varable range : ±9.999 kHz• PHONES connector : 3-conductor 6.35 (d) mm (1⁄4″)• External SP connector : 2-conductor 3.5 (d) mm

(1⁄8″)/8 ø• DSP ANF attenuaton : More than 30 dB

(wth 1 kHz sngle tone)• DSP NR attenuaton : More than 6 dB

(nose rejecton n SSB)

Antenna tuner• Matchng mpedance range HF bands : 16.7 to 150 ø unbalanced

(Less than VSWR 3:1) 50 MHz band : 20 to 125 ø unbalanced

(Less than VSWR 2.5:1)• Mnmum operatng nput : 8 W (HF bands)

power 15 W (50MHz band)• Tunng accuracy : VSWR 1.5:1 or less• Inserton loss : Less than 1.0 dB

(after tunng at RF power 100W)

Spurous sgnals may be dsplayed on the spectrum scope screen regardless of the transcever’s state (Tx or Rx). They are gener-ated n the scope crcut. Ths does not ndcate a transcever mal-functon.

All stated specfcatons are typcal and subject to change wthout notce or oblgaton.

13

160

SPECIFICATIONS AND OPTIONS

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

AH-4 hf automatic antenna tuner

Specally desgned to tune a long wre antenna for HF/50 MHz bands partc-ularly n portable or moble operaton. The “PTT tune” functon provdes sm-ple operaton.• Input power ratng: 120 W

AH-2b antenna element

A 2.5 m long antenna ele-ment for moble operaton wth the AH-4.• Frequency coverage

7–54 MHz band wth the AH-4

SM-20 desktop microphone

Includes [UP]/[DOWN] swtches and a low cut functon.

SM-50 desktop microphone

Flexble arm dynamc mcrophone ncludng [UP]/[DOWN] swtches and a low cut functon.

SP-23 external speaker

4 audo flters; headphone jack; can connect to 2 transcevers.• Input mpedance: 8 ø• Max. nput power: 4 W

HM-36 hand microphone

Hand mcrophone equpped wth [UP]/[DOWN] swtches.

CT-17 ci-v level converter unit

For remote transcever control usng a personal computer equpped wth an RS-232C port. You can change fre-quences, operatng mode, memory channels, etc., va your computer.

IC-PW1/EURO HF/50 MHz ALL BAND 1 kW LINEAR AMPLIFIER

Full-duty 1 kW lnear amplfer ncludng an automatc antenna tuner. Has auto-matc tunng and band selecton capablty. Full break-n (QSK) operaton s pos-sble. The amplfer/power supply unt and the remote control unt are separated.

PS-126 dc power supply

• Output voltage : 13.8 V DC• Max. output current : 25 A

161

13 SPECIFICATIONS AND OPTIONS

Options

• MB-121 carrying handle

Convenent when carryng the transcever.The same as that attached wth the transcever.

GeneralThe IC-7600’s frmware can be updated f desred. By updatng the frmware, new functon(s) can be added and the mprovement of performance parameters can be obtaned.

Refer to Preparaton (p. 163) and Frmware update (p. 164) for detals.

Ask your dealer or dstrbutor about how to update the frmware f you have no PC.

CautionCAUTION: NEVER turn the transcever power OFF whle updatng the frmware. You can turn the transcever power OFF only when the transcever dsplays that rebootng s requred.If you turn the transcever power OFF, or f a power falure occurs durng updatng, the transcever frm-ware wll be corrupted and you wll have to send the transcever back to the nearest Icom dstrbutor for repar. Ths type of repar s out of warranty even f the warranty perod s stll vald.

Recommendation!Backng up the settngs and/or memory contents to the USB-Memory before startng the frmware update s recommended.Settngs and/or memory contents wll be lost or returned to default settngs when the frmware update s performed.

14

162

UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

The downloaded frmware data (e.g. 7600_110.dat) should be coped to the USB-Memory (n “IC-7600” folder) usng an avalable USB port (USB hub may be requred; purchased separately from your PC dealer).

PreparationD Firmware and firm utilityThe latest frmware can be downloaded from the Icom home page va the Internet. Access the followng URL to download the frm utlty and the latest frmware. http://www.com.co.jp/world/support/ndex.html

InformationThe downloaded frmware data (e.g. 7600_110.dat) should be coped to the USB-Memory (n “IC-7600” folder) usng an avalable USB port (USB hub may be requred; purchased separately from your PC dealer).

D File downloadingq Access the followng URL drectly. http://www.com.co.jp/world/support/ndex.htmlw Clck “Frmware Updates/Software Downloads” lnk

then clck the frmware fle lnk.

e Read “Regardng ths Download Servce” carefully, then clck [AGREE].

r Clck [Save] n the dsplayed Fle Download dalog.

t Select the desred locaton n whch you want to save the frmware, then clck [Save] n the ds-played Fle Download dalog.

• Fle download starts.y After download s completed, extract the fle. • The frmware and the frm utlty are compressed n

“zp” format, respectvely. • When updatng the transcever usng wth the USB-

Memory, copy the extracted frmware (e.g. 7600_110.dat) to the USB-Memory IC-7600 folder.

• The USB-Memory must have been formatted by the IC-7600. (p. 143)

Click

Read carefully

Click

Select the savinglocation

Click7600_110.dat

163

14 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

The transcever ndcates ts frmware verson nfor-maton after turnng power ON f the openng mes-sage screen ndcaton capablty s ON. (p. 127)

q Copy the downloaded frmware data nto the “IC-7600” folder of the USB-Memory.

• The USB-Memory must have been formatted by the IC-7600.

w Insert the USB-Memory nto the [USB] (A) connec-tor on the front panel.

e Push [EXIT/SET] several tmes to close a mult-functon screen, f necessary.

r Push [SET] (F-6) to select set mode menu screen.t Push [USB] (F-6) to select USB-Memory set

menu.y Push and hold [FIRM UP] (F-3) for 1 sec.

u Read the dsplayed precauton carefully. • Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to scroll the ndcaton. • Push [CANCEL] (F-6) to cancel the frmware updatng.

i After you read and understand all of the precau-tons, push [OK] (F-5).

• [OK] (F-5) appears only followng the precautons. • Push [CANCEL] (F-6) to cancel the frmware updatng.

o Push [Y] (F-2) or [Z] (F-3) to select the frmware fle, then push [FIRM UP] (F-4).

!0 Read the dsplayed precautons carefully.

!1 If you agree, push and hold [OK] (F-5) for 1 sec. to start the frmware update.

• Push [CANCEL] (F-6) to cancel the frmware updatng.

!2 Whle loadng the frmware from the USB-Memory, the dalog as at left s dsplayed.

F-1 F-2

F-5 F-6

EXIT/SET

USBSET CANCEL

DIR/FILE

OK

F-4

FIRM UP

F-3

FIRM UP

[USB] (A)

/ /

/ /

/


Firmware update

164

14UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

Frmware update (Contnued)

!3 After the frmware loadng s completed, the trans-cever starts the update automatcally and the da-log at rght s dsplayed.

RWARNING: NEVER turn the IC-7600 power OFF at ths stage.The transcever frmware wll be corrupted.

!4 When the dalog dsappears, the precauton at left s dsplayed.

!5 Read the precauton carefully, and then push [OK] (F-5).

• Return to USB-Memory set menu.

!6 Push [POWER] to turn the IC-7600 power OFF, then ON agan.

!7 Dependng on the update, one or two dalog boxes as at rght appear n sequence.

RWARNING: NEVER turn the IC-7600 power OFF at ths stage. The transcever frmware wll be corrupted.

!8 After the dalog dsappears, the frmware updat-ng s completed and normal operaton screen appears.

165

14 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

INSTALLATION NOTESFor amateur base staton nstallatons t s recom-mended that the forward clearance n front of the an-tenna array s calculated relatve to the EIRP (Effec-tve Isotropc Radated Power). The clearance heght below the antenna array can be determned n most cases from the RF power at the antenna nput term-nals.

As dfferent exposure lmts have been recommended for dfferent frequences, a relatve table shows a gudelne for nstallaton consderatons.

Below 30 MHz, the recommended lmts are specfied n terms of V/m or A/m fields as they are lkely to fall wthn the near-feld regon. Smlarly, the antennas may be physcally short n terms of electrcal length and that the nstallaton wll requre some antenna matchng devce whch can create local, hgh ntensty magnetc felds. Analyss of such MF nstallatons s best consdered n assocaton wth publshed gud-ance notes such as the FCC OET Bulletn 65 Edton 97-01 and ts annexes relatve to amateur transmtter nstallatons.The EC recommended lmts are almost dentcal to the FCC specfied ‘uncontrolled’ lmts and tables exst that show pre-calculated safe dstances for dfferent antenna types for dfferent frequency bands. Further nformaton can be found at http://www.arrl.org/.

• Typical amateur radio installationExposure dstance assumes that the predomnant ra-daton pattern s forward and that radaton vertcally downwards s at unty gan (sdelobe suppresson s equal to man lobe gan). Ths s true of almost every gan antenna today. Exposed persons are assumed to be beneath the antenna array and have a typcal heght of 1.8 m.

The fgures assume the worst case emsson of a constant carrer.

For the bands 10 MHz and hgher the followng power densty lmts have been recommended: 10–50 MHz 2 W/sq m

Vertical clearance by EIRP output 1 Watts 2.1 m 10 Watts 2.8 m 25 Watts 3.4 m 100 Watts 5 m 1000 Watts 12 m

Forward clearance by EIRP output 100 Watts 2 m 1000 Watts 6.5 m 10,000 Watts 20 m 100,000 Watts 65 m

In all cases any possble rsk depends on the trans-mtter beng actvated for long perods. (actual recom-mendaton lmts are specfied as an average durng 6 mnutes) Normally the transmtter s not actve for long perods of tme. Some rado lcenses wll requre that a tmer crcut automatcally cuts off the transmtter after 1–2 mnutes etc.

Smlarly some modes of transmsson, SSB, CW, AM etc. have a lower ‘average’ output power and the as-sessed rsk s even lower.

Versons of the IC-7600 whch dsplay the “CE” symbol on the seral number seal, comply wth the essental requrements of the European Rado and Telecommunca-ton Termnal Drectve 1999/5/EC.

Ths warnng symbol ndcates that ths equpment operates n non-harmonsed frequency bands and/or may be subject to lcensng condtons n the country of use. Be sure to check that you have the correct verson of ths rado or the correct pro-grammng of ths rado, to comply wth na-tonal lcensng requrement.

• List of Country codes (ISO 3166-1)Country Codes Country Codes

1234567891011121314151617

AustraBelgumBulgaraCroataCzech RepublcCyprusDenmarkEstonaFnlandFranceGermanyGreeceHungaryIcelandIrelandItalyLatva

ATBEBGHRCZCYDKEEFIFRDEGRHUISIEITLV

18192021222324252627282930313233

LechtenstenLthuanaLuxembourgMaltaNetherlandsNorwayPolandPortugalRomanaSlovakaSlovenaSpanSwedenSwtzerlandTurkeyUnted Kngdom

LILTLUMTNLNOPLPTROSKSIESSECHTRGB

15

166

CE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

DECLARATIONOF CONFORMITY

We Icom Inc. Japan1-1-32, Kamiminami, Hirano-kuOsaka 547-0003, Japan

Kind of equipment: HF/50 MHz TRANSCEIVER

Type-designation: iC- 7600

Signature

Authorized representative name

Place and date of issueDeclare on our sole responsibility that this equipment complies with theessential requirements of the Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive, 1999/5/EC, and that any applicable Essential TestSuite measurements have been performed.

Version (where applicable):

This compliance is based on conformity with the following harmonised standards, specifications or documents:i)ii)iii)iv)

Düsseldorf 23rd Jan. 2009

Y. FurukawaGeneral Manager

EN 301 489-1 v1.6.1 (September 2005)EN 301 489-15 v1.2.1 (August 2002) EN 301 783-2 v1.1.1 (September 2000) EN 60950-1 : 2001

167

15 CE

168

MEMO

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

169

MEMO

170

MEMO

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

171

MEMO

172

MEMO

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

1-1-32 Kammnam, Hrano-ku, Osaka 547-0003, Japan

A-6722H-1EXPrnted n Japan© 2009 Icom Inc.

< Intended Country of Use >ATFIITPLGBRO

BEFRLVPTISTR

CYDELTSKLIHR

CZGRLUSINO

DKHUMTESCH

EEIENLSEBG


BEFRLVPTISTR

CYDELTSKLIHR

CZGRLUSINO

DKHUMTESCH

EEIENLSEBG


BEFRLVPTISTR

CYDELTSKLIHR

CZGRLUSINO

DKHUMTESCH

EEIENLSEBG


BEFRLVPTISTR

CYDELTSKLIHR

CZGRLUSINO

DKHUMTESCH

EEIENLSEBG

IC-7600 #10(France)


BEFRLVPTISTR

CYDELTSKLIHR

CZGRLUSINO

DKHUMTESCH

EEIENLSEBG

IC-7600 #03(Europe)

IC-7600 #04(Europe-1)

IC-7600 #05(Spain)

IC-7600 #09(Italy)

Documents

IC-7600 manual